Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 263 . 265 . 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 412 . 415 . 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 525 . 536 . 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 668 . 668 . 671 . 674 . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 803 . 805 . 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. hence. quantities. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. In this case. drawing sheets.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you will use the default template. drawings. If the length of the elevation is changed. and residential. If you move the partition. the hierarchy of elements. the operation of the software is parametric. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. 2D and 3D view. and plans. every drawing sheet. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In the Revit Architecture model. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. click Training Files. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. and schedules required for a building project. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In this case. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. You learn the terminology. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built.rte. As you work in drawing and schedule views. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. 13 Click OK. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and phases when you need it. For most tutorial projects. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. sections. and open Metric\Templates. and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select DefaultMetric. the floor or roof remains connected. construction. the parameter is one of association or connection. how to navigate the user interface. review the Revit Architecture templates. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. scope. schedules. and click Open. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design.

■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. walls. and cabinets are model components. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. doors. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. They display in relevant views of the model. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Examples include detail lines.When you change something. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Understanding the Basics | 7 . Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and reference planes are datum elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. doors. and roofs are model elements. levels. tags. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and keynotes are annotation elements. windows. If you can draw. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. dimensions. For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. For example. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. walls and roofs are hosts. filled regions. For example. windows. programming is not required. and 2D detail components. Datum elements help to define project context. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. tags. For example. dimensions. grids. The second is its approach to propagating building changes.

first floor. Project: In Revit Architecture. Often. By using a single project file. schedules. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. top of wall. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. and ceilings. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls.In Revit Architecture. you must be in a section or elevation view. Most often. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. section views. To place levels. and drawings of the design. for example. elevation views. The project file contains all information for the building design. and types. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. you do nothing to establish these relationships. or bottom of foundation. This information includes components used to design the model. floors. families. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . However. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you can explicitly control them. In other cases. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. for example. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. such as roofs. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. and so forth). Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. from geometry to construction data. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. views of the project.

A type can be a specific size of a family. In the steps that follow. and levels. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. In the following illustration. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. the user interface is labeled. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. floors. System families can be transferred between projects. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. identical use. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. dimensions. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. categories of model elements include walls and beams. A type can also be a style. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). making it easy to understand what each button represents. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. For example. roofs. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. specifically its clear user interface. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. ceilings. For example. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). System families include walls. However.

TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. By default. In addition. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. This creates a new project based on the default template. click (New). new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Many of the commands have shortcut keys.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. which are listed on the menu. and View. Edit. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. While working in the drawing area. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . For example. you type the required key combination to perform the command. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.

the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . when you add a door. On the left side of the Options Bar. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. For example. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. 9 In the Type Selector. When you select the Door tool. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. a door type is specified. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model.

■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. immediately below the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . containing buttons grouped by function. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. In the drawing area. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog displays.

click the tab in the Design Bar. select Views (all). ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab.11 Click OK. In the Project Browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The respective commands display on the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

sheets. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. schedules. double-click its name. 3D). scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. delete. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. To open a view. families. walls. elevations. reports. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. families. family category (doors. The browser is dockable. and groups. windows). and rename views. and group name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area.

In the bottom left corner of the window. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. click Wall. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. click Cancel. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. The cursor displays as a pencil." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Do not click. In this case. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. After creating a browser organization scheme.

Windows: From any window. 20 Press TAB. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session.18 On the Design Bar. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. press F1 for context-sensitive help. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. regarding selected elements in a view. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. It highlights when the cursor is over it. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. In the status bar. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. In addition. There are several tools that help you find information. Click the Help button. The status bar also provides information. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Toolbar: From the toolbar. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Tooltips: To see tooltips. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. You can also press SHIFT+F1. in conjunction with tooltips. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . press F1 for help. If no Help button displays. click Modify to end the Wall command. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. When you place the cursor over an element. find a keyword on the Index tab. You can use this tri-pane. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. click on the Standard toolbar. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. After you are familiar with these tasks. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow.

18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 5 On the View toolbar. For example. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). There are several ways to access zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. click Training Files. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. In the drawing area. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.rvt. In the following steps. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. the view zooms out from the building model.

The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. As you move the mouse. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 6 Click Zoom To Fit. . use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 7 Click in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. the view zooms in on the selected area. on the View toolbar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. When you release the mouse button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 10 To display SteeringWheels. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.

14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. Similar controls. These are the drag controls. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. To define settings for SteeringWheels.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click the SteeringWheels tab. 15 To exit the wheel. expand Floor Plans. Cnst. When drawing or modifying a building model. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. moving the wheel to the desired location. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click Help. display along the ends. and select the wall. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Small blue dots. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . bottoms. called drag controls. 17 Type ZR. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. For more information about SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. and double-click 2nd Flr. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. press ESC. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. as shown. expand Views (all). referred to as shape handles.

click to specify the starting position. After selecting the element to move. such as Move and Copy. 23 Click next to the lower wall. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. and on the Tools toolbar. The table moves down. as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and click again to specify the ending position. for example. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.18 Click and drag the left control. to lengthen the wall. you want to move the table closer to the wall. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . moving the cursor to the left horizontally. click (Move). 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Some commands. In this case.

stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 26 On the Undo menu. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . such as the Lines command. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). and drag it on top of the table. select the second item in the list. and click again to end it. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. or press CTRL+Z. click Lines. click the Undo command. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. 24 Select the plant. Some commands. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.29 To end the command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. On the Design Bar. Press ESC twice. click Modify.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

detail. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. In this tutorial. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. In Revit Architecture. this tutorial uses imperial units only. illustrating how building components work together. or referenced as a drafting view. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. When you have finished these tutorials. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. and annotate building assemblies. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Use detail components to define an assembly. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. 27 . Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. but for training purposes. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view.

create a reference callout. enter Window Head Detail. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . scroll until the folder is displayed.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Drafting View. and reference a drafting view. for Name. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. click Training Files. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. 3 In the Scale list. If necessary. import a DWG detail. you will create a drafting view. and click OK. 2 In the Drafting View dialog.

5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. displaying the extents of the detail. click Training Files. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.In the Project Browser. 9 Type ZR. as shown. and click Open. 6 In the Colors field list. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. 10 In the drawing area. located directly to the left of the drawing area. The drawing area is still blank. The model zooms out. select Black and White.dwg. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model.). Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail.

click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. click Callout. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . in the Type Selector.The view displays to the specified area. 13 Click Reference other view. to activate the view selection list. select Detail View: Detail. 12 On the Options Bar. and in the Scale list. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the drawing area.

The reference callout is created. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. c_express_workshop_details_start. select Callout. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . 3 In the drawing area. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. double-click the reference callout tag head.rvt. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. in the Type Selector. select Detail View: Detail. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. adjust the detail view display settings. and in the Scale list. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area.

5 In the Rename View dialog. under Detail Views(Detail). select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. for Name. under Detail Views (Detail). click Modify to clear the selection. 6 In the drawing area. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 4 Right-click Detail 0. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. double-click Wall Base 1. and click Rename. enter Wall Base 1. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. This is the view crop region. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. bordered by a solid line. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .

select As Underlay. under Graphics. click (Hide Crop Region).12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. right-click. and click View Properties. 13 On the View Control Bar. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the drawing area. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. 16 Click OK. for Display Model.

typical details can easily be placed. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. type 1' 6''.Brick on Mtl. 17 On the View Control Bar. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. and press ENTER. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . 19 In the Type Selector. click Detail Components. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. on the Options Bar. Stud. 20 In the drawing area. By grouping detail components. If the crop region is enlarged. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. Directly above the drawing area.

23 Using the same method. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. add the following detail components as shown. and click Create Instance. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 25 In the Project Browser.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. click Modify to end the command. as shown. expand Groups ➤ Detail.

select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .28 Press ESC to end the command. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail.

rvt. For more information about customizing a keynote database.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. or instructions within a construction documentation package. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. c_express_workshop_details_start. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. and verify that Horizontal. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. for Full Path. and format keynote styles. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. Leader. and Free End are selected. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. special notes. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. in the type selector. click Browse. map keynotes by material.txt. 4 On the Options Bar. and under Keynote Table. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . In the next exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can customize this list. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Training Files. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.

8 Click to place the tag. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. 7 Click to place the leader arm. Keynoting | 39 . a question mark displays. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . Either move the text inside. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader.5 In the drawing area. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. If no value has been specified. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail.

Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Material. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 13 Click to place the tag. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 16 In the drawing area. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 15 Select 07 21 00.

and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . legends. Click OK. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson.All items within the selection display in red. Only the keynotes remain selected. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). 19 In the Type Selector. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. 17 On the Options Bar.Boxed. Select Keynote Tags. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Click Check None. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views.

but for training purposes. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. update the project information element properties.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Add labels to a title block. Place views on drawing sheets. In this lesson. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . this tutorial uses imperial units only. you will create a sheet. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. and modify and update the project sheet title block. Update drawing sheet and project information. In this exercise.

a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. 3 Click OK. In the Project Browser. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. In Revit Architecture. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). scroll until the folder is displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. If necessary. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. or in the element properties of the title block. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.

6 In the Title Block. under Sheets(all). right-click A602 . 7 Enter K. double-click Checker. you can enter ZE to zoom out. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. Then. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. enter Sections/Details. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. In this tutorial. click Modify to clear the selection. Click OK. hold down the wheel and drag. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. 9 In the Project Browser. To zoom in and out. Smith and press ENTER. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.4 Type ZR. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. and click Rename. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . For Name. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. To pan. enter A602. 8 On the Design Bar. roll the wheel. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle.Unnamed. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. 5 In the drawing area.

Smith. 13 Click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. enter Freighthouse Flats. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. For Project Name. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter Design Development. select the title block. click Text. 15 In the Options Bar. enter 4/10/2008. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Status. in the Type Selector. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. (Left) is selected. enter J. The Family Editor opens. 20 Click and type Project Status. For Client Name. 17 On the Design Bar. select Text : 1/8''. 16 Type ZR. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area.

27 Select Wrap between parameters only. as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Label. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters.21 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. under Category Parameters. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 22 Using the same method. click (Load into Project). to add 28 Using the same method. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. select Label : 3/16''. and verify that (Top) are selected. in the Type Selector. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. as shown. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click. 29 On the Design Bar. add Project Issue Date parameter. click Modify to exit the command.

click Browse. Next you will create. you will create. place and modify a keynote legend. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. select Override parameter values of existing types. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.Project. and under Keynote Table. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.txt. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. and click Yes. representing the view or schedule. for Name. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. for Full Path. to a drawing sheet. In this exercise. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. click Training Files.30 In the Reload Family dialog. enter Keynote Legend . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. a viewport displays.

and drag Keynote Legend . 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. clear Show Headers. under Text. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. as shown. and click OK. expand Legends. double-click A601 . TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.Sections/Details. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. on the Appearance tab. under Sheets (all).

12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. The keynote legend is visible. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend .Project as shown. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .

14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. enter Keynote Legend . and click OK. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. right-click Keynote Legend . and click Properties. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. click Edit. not keynotes. 19 Click OK twice. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. and click OK. as shown. The Keynote Legend is now blank. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. under Legends. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. for View Name. at the bottom of the Filter tab. select Filter by sheet. expand Detail Views (Detail). 15 In the Project Browser.Project. for Filter. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 16 In the Element Properties dialog.Sheet.

The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. The view title with line displays below the viewport. as shown. The view remains selected. and then add and update a Drawing list. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet 1. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . double-click A0 . you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing.The keynote legend is automatically updated.

and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. Revit Architecture displays a view title. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties.When you place a view on a sheet. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Type ZR. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. Press ESC to clear the selection. and zoom in on the drawing list. define the information to include in a view title. 5 In the Project Browser. The drawing list remains selected. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. As part of a construction document set. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. as shown. expand Schedules/Quantities. You can specify text attributes for view titles. or omit view titles from sheets. by default. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets.

Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 .Ceiling Plans. The drawing list display is updated. while pressing SHIFT. and click Properties. clear Appears In Drawing List. under Identity Data. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select A602 . under Sheets (all). including only sheets that contain views.Sections/Details and select A801 . and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click the selected sheets.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

For example.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. As you develop the building design. the wall or column will move with it. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. it is good practice to test the constraints. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. If the grid moves. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. a central service core. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. 57 . and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. a curtain wall.

subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. you load any required family type that is not in your project. In practice. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. 2 In the New Project dialog. you will use the default template. with an RVT extension. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. The new project opens. construction. views. West. select Project. notice four elevation markers. After the beginning exercises. under Create new. 3 Under Template file. and customize the project as necessary. In views that display elevation markers. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. To create the project file. levels. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. from the product library. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. 5 Click OK. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. Creating the Project In this exercise. and residential. The project is stored as a single file. click New. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. such as a door or window. In the drawing area in the right pane. under Projects. South. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. and click Browse. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. For this project. but contains no geometry. you design inside the elevation markers. you use a template that is provided with the software.rte. click Training Files. and settings. East. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . verify that the second option is selected.

content and building model reports. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. and other properties. delete. expand Views (all). or by opening the view in the Project Browser. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. and Elevations (Building Elevation).views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). These views are customizable: you can rename them. display in the south elevation. 7 If necessary. NOTE If you create a project without a template. Sheets (all). and elevation views created in the project by the template. enter Revit Retail Building. double-click South. and duplicate levels. 13 In the file window. double-click Metric. Families. 10 In the Project Browser. schedules. then expand Floor Plans. notice the Legends. 14 For File name. will be accessible from the Project Browser. Two level lines. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). Ceiling Plans. change their properties.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. such as schedules and legends. You can add. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. duplicate them. and click Training Files. As you design and document your building model. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. Creating the Project | 59 . reflected ceiling plan views. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. 8 Under Floor Plans. sheets. and families in your project. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. locate the Project Browser. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. heights. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. Groups. the view you see in the drawing area. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. created by the template. and delete them. as well as change their names. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. Schedules/Quantities.

Adding Project Levels In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click Save. After you modify the two default levels. and on the General tab. expand Views (all). or constrained. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. You learn how the levels are locked. view the Save reminder interval. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques.15 For Save as type. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. and press ENTER. so that when one level moves. and double-click South. you will want to save your work frequently. enter 00 Foundation. When you begin designing. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building.rvt) is selected. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). You change the names of the 2 default levels. Adding Project Levels on page 60. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. doors. to each other. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and windows within the building model. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. the other levels move and change with it. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Project Files (*. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial.

6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. click Level. If it does not. right-click. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter -1800. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. and press ENTER. By default. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. Next. Adding Project Levels | 61 . When you add the new level.TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. enter 0. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. which should display by default. not all the tabs are visible. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. and click Basics. and press ENTER. view the Design Bar. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 14 Click Plan View Types. 13 On the Options Bar. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 01 Entry Level. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. and then move it up. This is the Options Bar. and click OK. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created.

click Rename. 21 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. and rename the corresponding views. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. enter 3750. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. click (Pick Lines). click to specify the endpoint of the level line. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click Level 3. or on the Design Bar. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level.As you move the cursor. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 Enter 3750. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 26 Press ESC. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. 23 On the Options Bar. and press ESC. using a different option. and move it slightly upward.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. If you create a level by copying it. 19 Click OK. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. you add another level. Next. under Floor Plans. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 25 Click to place the level line. and enter 02 Level. click Level. click Modify to end the command.

Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. If you select a level and click its lock. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. the levels are no longer constrained.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Adding Project Levels | 63 . and you can move them independently. as shown. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Notice that by moving the top level. all the levels move.

you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. click Grid. On the Design Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. In the following exercise. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. under Floor Plans. the column height changes as well. select (Draw). By using the grid to control the placement of columns.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. and specify the grid line endpoint. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. In a later exercise. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. Move the cursor up. so that if the roof elevation changes. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. specify a start point for the grid line. When the grid is complete. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. click Modify. 3 On the Options Bar. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.

Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. and click to place the line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and for Offset. Enter A. On the Options Bar. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. and click to place the line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and press ENTER. enter 7500 mm. enter 7500 mm. for Offset. click (Pick Lines). Click to place the grid line. click Grid. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Next.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. enter 4500 mm.

■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. On the Options Bar. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. as shown. click Grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 11 On the Design Bar. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm.8 Press ESC. click Grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A.

18 On the Design Bar. 15 Starting with grid line A.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 21 Press ESC twice. click Dimension. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 22 While pressing CTRL. click (Aligned). Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click Dimension. 14 On the Options Bar. select grid lines C and 3. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension.

and on the Options Bar. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. and select None. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. and press ESC. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. and select grid line A.5mm Bubble with Gap. enter 6. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. select grid line 5. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ESC. click Edit/New. If necessary. At the left endpoint of the grid line. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. The pins are hidden. enter 50mm. 33 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. click Modify. until it is closer to grid line A. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 31 For End Segments Length. 24 Press ESC. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the drawing area. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. Two pins display on the grid lines. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 32 Click OK twice. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. By pinning these central grid lines.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click the value for Center Segment. until it is closer to grid line 5. and click OK. 29 In the Name dialog. (Element Properties). click Duplicate. click .

and in the Type Selector. click (Grid Intersection). select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. 39 In the Type Selector. click Structural Column. The original continuous grid lines are restored. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. For Place By. and on the Options Bar. select Grid : 6. click Modify. 37 Select the grid lines again. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. click Finish. select Grid : 6. select all of the grid lines. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 36 On the Design Bar.5mm Bubble. 35 In the Type Selector. and press ESC.5mm Bubble with Gap.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines.

If it is unlocked. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 43 Press ESC. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 01 Entry Level. click Activate Dimensions. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 52 On the Options Bar. select grid line A. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for From. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. click Camera.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 47 Enter 9000. 45 While pressing CTRL. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. lock it. 46 On the Options Bar. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. and unlock it. Next. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. and press ENTER. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. under Floor Plans. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked.

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. and click to place the target point of the camera.

enter To Building. When you finish adding beams. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. and then copy them to subsequent levels. Adding Beams In this exercise. Right-click 3D View 1. expand 3D Views. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding Beams on page 72. In the Rename View dialog.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. displays in bold under 3D Views. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. under Views (all). named 3D View 1 by default. The current view. and click Rename.

under 3D Views. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . view the icons on the View Control Bar. click Finish.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Adding Beams | 73 . verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 4 Click Medium. 7 On the Options Bar. select each grid line. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. the icon on the right side of the scale. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. click (Create Beam On Grid). The view is currently set to Coarse. 8 While pressing CTRL. 6 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Options Bar. The selected grid lines display as red.

The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. click (Default 3D View). 14 Select one of the beams. and click OK. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. right-click. under Floor Plans. select 06 Roof. press and hold SHIFT.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click 01 Entry Level. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. select 02 Level. and click Select All Instances. click Modify. 12 On the View toolbar.

25 In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. and click Select All Instances. (Element Properties). for Top Level. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. click 24 Press ESC. view the Top Level parameter.to the 5th level. 21 With the column selected. under 3D Views. right-click. When you created the columns. under Constraints. All of the columns display as red. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. double-click To Building. select 06 Roof. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. and if necessary. under Instance Parameters. 06 Roof. and click OK. 20 Click Cancel. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. resize the view to see the entire structure. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Beams | 75 . 22 On the Options Bar. right-click.

The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 28 Save the drawing. under Elevations. but you want to display them in less detail. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. as lines only.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

29 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ESC to end the command. click Framing Elevation. double-click 00 Foundation. Adding Braces on page 77. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. you create 8 framing elevation views. 3 On the Options Bar. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Braces | 77 . 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Braces In this exercise. To better add the braces to the structure. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid.

The associated framing elevation view displays. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. click to specify the start point of the brace. After you add the final brace. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. and when the endpoint snap displays. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. but when placed the braces are placed. click Brace. 11 Using the same technique. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary).Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 8 In the Type Selector. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. 7 On the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. press ESC twice. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level.

Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. The height of the roof lowers. Adding Braces | 79 . delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. and press ENTER.

double-click 00 Foundation. but this time add them from right to left. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 10000 mm. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. under Floor Plans. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. and press ENTER. 14 On the Standard toolbar.13 Double-click the 04 Level height.

20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. and on the Options Bar. NOTE As you add braces. under Floor Plans. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. double-click 00 Foundation. Adding Braces | 81 . 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Select grid line A. as shown in the 3D view below. enter 12000 mm. and press ENTER. click Activate Dimensions. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked).Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 23 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Foundation In this exercise. double-click {3D}. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. beams. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 In the Project Browser. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Save the drawing. 28 On the Standard toolbar. Test connectivity of the columns. and if necessary. double-click 00 Foundation. click and roof height. 26 In the Project Browser. lock it.24 In the Project Browser. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. under 3D Views. and drag it away from the structure. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. under Elevations. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. under Floor Plans. double-click South. grid size. Creating a Foundation on page 82. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move.

You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. In the Element Properties dialog. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. for Level. click Edit. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. The foundation pile cap now displays. and press ESC twice. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. Creating a Foundation | 83 . you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. expand Families. select Unlimited. under Extents. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. In the View Range dialog. double-click 00 Foundation. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. click Training Files. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree.Before you can add the pile caps. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. The pile cap has been added in the view. Click OK twice. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and expand Structural Foundations. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. After you load the pile cap family. for View Range. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. and how to load specific families into a project. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. under View Depth. and drag it to the drawing area. A warning displays. 9 Close the warning dialog.

12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . When the final pile cap is placed. under 3D Views. press ESC twice. and click Create Similar.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap.

All columns in the building model display as red. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 2 Select one of the columns. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. beams. you change the types of the columns. and brace families into the project.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. right-click. You load new column. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . It is not available in a perspective or camera view. beam. under 3D Views. and click Select All Instances. double-click {3D}. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and braces that you used to create the building structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click (Default 3D View). 18 In the Type Selector. right-click. 19 On the Design Bar. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. 9 In the Type Selector. In the following steps. for Type. 10 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. The building model displays the round hollow columns. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. and click Select All Instances.5CHS.6X15. enter 75mm. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. click Modify. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.3 In the Type Selector. but it is the only size of its type currently available.2X101. the braces as well as the beams change. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. and changing its size parameter. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Brace. enter 75mm. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. This not the size that you want to use. and click OK. for d. select the braces in the elevation one by one. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 16 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Selector. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. The brace type changes. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. under Dimensions. 15 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 In the Name dialog. you change the brace type. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. click Edit/New. 17 While pressing CTRL.9. double-click Elevation 1-a.

select Auto . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Under Positioning. After the files are linked. select m_RRB_structure_complete. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. and click Open. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog.rvt.Origin to Origin. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model.

under Elevations. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. select Levels 00 through 06. select the linked Revit model. and click Select Link. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. depending on the project. 5 On the Tools toolbar. 6 In the drawing area. structural members. click Copy. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. and walls could also be copy/monitored. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. double-click South. 8 On the Options Bar.4 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. After the link is established. Grids. select Multiple. while pressing CTRL. In this case. click (Copy/Monitor). however. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 In the drawing area.

Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. 15 In the New Plan dialog. for Floor Plan views. and click Delete. click OK. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. while pressing SHIFT. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . The 06 Roof floor plan opens.10 On the Options Bar. 18 Using the same method. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. delete the Level 2 floor plan. right-click Level 1. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. First. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. click Finish mode. under Floor Plans. click Finish. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Click OK. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06).

22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. under Floor Plans. right-click. select the Topography : Surface. 25 In the View Templates dialog. right-click. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. click OK. under Floor Plans. enter Floor Plans. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. 21 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. double-click 01 Entry Level.19 In the Project Browser. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. 24 In the New View Template dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. 20 In the drawing area. for Name.

33 Click at the upper left of the grid. under Names. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . click Camera. under Floor Plans. 34 In the 3D view that displays. select Floor Plans. double-click Site. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser.

click Training Files. 36 In the Rename View dialog. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . stairs. expand 3D Views. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. and railings are also created from sketches. and click OK. such as roofs. and click Rename. Adding Floors In this exercise. enter To Building. right-click 3D View 1. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.rvt. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor.35 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To create floors. Adding Floors on page 92. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. Some other Revit Architecture elements.

click Lines. Leave this dimension unlocked. At the top left corner of the grid. click Dimension. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. You are now in the Sketch Editor. click Floor. If the grid changes size. On the Options Bar. Do not lock the dimension. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. On the Sketch tab. under Floor Plans. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. Move the cursor to the left.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. click (Rectangle). and then the first horizontal grid line. select the top floor line. Adding Floors | 93 . double-click 01 Entry Level. past the first vertical grid line. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. and elements in the current view display as gray.

94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor to the left dimension. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and change their values to 300 mm. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. click Modify. press ENTER.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. and then press ESC. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Enter 300. select the top floor line. Select and lock the dimensions. At the top left corner of the grid. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. They display on the floor sketch. and click the temporary dimension value. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. Do not lock the dimensions.

and press ESC. click Lines. click Floor. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. Next. Select the three remaining floor lines. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. click Edit. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line.8 Select the floor. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. On the Options Bar. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. using a different sketching technique. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. click (Pick Lines). you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. Adding Floors | 95 . enter 1500mm. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. On the Sketch tab. double-click 02 Level. on the Design Bar. and lock the dimensions. and on the Options Bar. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. click Quit Sketch. and for Offset.

18 On the Options Bar. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. under Floor Plans. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click (Rectangle). 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. double-click 03 Level. click Lines. and a lock icon displays. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 17 On the Sketch tab. click Floor. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click (Align). The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 14 On the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor displays. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser.

Alternatively. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. click Finish Sketch. click Edit. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor.24 On the Design Bar. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. select 05 Roof Garden. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 31 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 35 On the Sketch tab. 32 Select the floor. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and on the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click {3D}. Adding Floors | 97 . and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and lock the edges. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans.

click to place the roof line. click Lines. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a Roof on page 98. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. To create the roof. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. When a blue dashed line displays. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. double-click 06 Roof. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. enter 1800 mm. and press ENTER.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. Click (Pick Lines).rvt. ■ ■ For Offset.

7 On the Options Bar. Adding a Roof | 99 .6 Select grid line 5. enter 300 mm. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. and when the blue dashed line displays. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). click to place the roof line. for Offset.

and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Roof. click (Trim/Extend).10 Press ESC. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. select the roof. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

click (Add new points to the slab shape). 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Adding a Roof | 101 . move the cursor down below the roof. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. and press ENTER. for Elevation. click Section.14 On the Options Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. on grid D. 17 On the Design Bar. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the section. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. enter -100 mm.

under Floor Plans. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (Element Properties). 24 In the Project Browser. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. for Structure [1]. double-click 06 Roof. In section. 30 Click OK 3 times. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. for Structure. and on the Options Bar. click Edit. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. select Variable.20 On the Design Bar. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. select the roof. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). click Edit/New.

Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. Adding a Roof | 103 . 37 If necessary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 41 Starting with the left front edge.31 On the Design Bar. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. 40 In the Type Selector. select each edge. 38 In the 3D view. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. moving counter-clockwise. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. and press DELETE. 33 In the warning dialog. click Modify. select the section line. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click OK. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In this case. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click (Default 3D View). the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. select Fascia : Fascia . zoom in to the roof. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window.Roof Edge. on the View Control Bar.

42 On the Design Bar. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. the curtain wall resizes with it. under 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click To Building. so if you resize the grid. you add a curtain wall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. click Modify.

and click OK. For Level. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).rvt. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. click to place the first curtain wall segment. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. enter 600 mm. select 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. enter 1050 mm. Click OK twice. For Offset. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click 01 Entry Level. for Spacing. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). enter Retail Storefront. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 3 In the Type Selector. for Join Condition. For Height. for Type. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. When you duplicate a type. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Spacing. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Name dialog. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. The type is saved in the project. enter 2100 mm. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Wall. click Training Files. select 05 Roof Garden.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Under Construction.

Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and trim each curtain wall segment. click (Trim/Extend).11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. so they remain in the view. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. under 3D Views. and lock the dimensions. If you want to hide them. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building. These dimensions are not in a sketch. you can delete the dimensions. 15 On the View Control Bar. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. If the grid moves. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid.

click Training Files. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating an Entrance | 107 . Creating an Entrance on page 107. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.

Do not select Columns. 2 On the View Control Bar. as these usually represent internal pilasters. clear one element to clear all the elements. under Views (all).Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 7 Click OK. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 6 Under Visibility. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 4 On the Model Categories tab. under the element list. All the elements in the list are selected. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click None. and double-click South. To better work with the curtain wall panels. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 5 Under Visibility. click All. in the center of the 01 Entry Level.

in this case an architectural elevation. in the Type Selector. and click OK. 17 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 12 With the panels selected. select Architectural Elevation. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 18 On the View Control Bar. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Modify. double-click {3D}. 10 Select 1 panel. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 16 On the View Control Bar. press and hold CTRL. under 3D Views.9 On the Design Bar. select System Panel : Solid. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.

double-click South.19 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click To Building. 20 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. under 3D Views.

24 On the Options Bar.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. select One Segment. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click Modify. click Add or Remove Segments. and click to select it. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. click Curtain Grid. 32 In the Type Selector. select another mullion to the right. and unpin it. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections).

35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. click (Default 3D View). 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. and view the new entrance. select it. 34 On the View toolbar. press TAB until it is selected. and unpin it.

Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. remove the mullions from the 2nd.38 Press DELETE. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . 39 Using the same process. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. open the North elevation. and 4th panels. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 3rd. 40 Optionally.

Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 5 Click OK. and click View Properties. under Graphics. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 Right-click in the view. click Training Files. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. for Underlay. select 02 Level. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt.

9 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and click OK. and click Rename. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 10 In the Rename View dialog. The cursor changes to a pencil.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . select the grip closest to the callout head. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 8 Select the callout. enter Display Area. under Floor Plans. click Callout. and click to complete the callout. which indicates you must draw the callout.

16 Select the section box. and click Flip Section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 13 Select the section line.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. click Section. 12 Draw a section line. as shown. 14 Press ESC.

and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. expand Sections (Building Section). 26 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 27 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). select Wall faces.135mm Partition (2-hr). and click OK. click (Align). enter Section Display Area. 24 On the Tools toolbar.17 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. 21 In the Type Selector. Click (Rectangle). Lock both alignments. and click Rename. select Basic Wall : Interior . for Prefer. click Wall. click Dimension. select Finish Face: Exterior. under Floor Plans. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. For Loc Line. 25 Press ESC twice. right-click Section 1.

38 On the View Control Bar. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. and lock the dimension. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Next. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 37 In the Project Browser. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. under Ceiling Plans.) 36 Press ESC twice. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. click Ceiling. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. double-click Section Display Area. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. 32 In the Type Selector. and lock the dimension. under Sections (Building Section). 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

47 In the Project Browser. 41 On the Options Bar. click Modify.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. and click (Element Properties). enter 2700 mm. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click to select the walls. for Top/Base. click to select it. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. On the Options Bar. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . under Constraints. enter 2700 mm. and click OK. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Element Properties). double-click Section Display Area. and click to select the walls. Select the 02 Level Floor. for Height Offset From Level. click Attach. under Sections. under Ceiling Plans. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. for Base Offset. under Constraints. 43 On the Design Bar. and press ESC. 46 Press ESC. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor.

52 In the Type Properties dialog. view the ceiling structure. for Structure. click Edit. under Construction. under Ceiling Plans. click Edit/New. 54 Click OK. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line.49 In the Project Browser. 58 On the Edit toolbar. for Type. and click . 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. click Cancel. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click (Rotate). click Cancel. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 51 In the Element Properties dialog. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling.

61 Press ESC.60 Click. enter 45. and press ENTER. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.

View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. click Shadows On. 65 On the View Control Bar. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 66 Optionally. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 64 On the View Control Bar. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Shadows Off. under 3D Views. double-click To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . and click to create a reference plane to the left. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. enter 1500 mm. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. 3 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. and copy it to the 05 Level.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. Move the cursor over grid line B. click Ref Plane. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and click to create a reference plane to the right.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. and for Offset. click Training Files. double-click 01 Entry Level.

and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the left reference plane. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining.5 On the Design Bar. 2. 7 Using the same method. C. and specify a point to create first stair flight. click Modify. click Stairs. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. and 3. shorten the right reference plane. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane.

and specify a point.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. select Finish Face: Interior. click Wall. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . 12 In the Type Selector. including its handrails. beyond the end of the stair. and select the 2nd reference plane. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair.225mm Masonry. select Basic Wall : Generic . Move the cursor down. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. The complete stair displays. Click (Rectangle). ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair.

17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. and click to select it. and specify a point away from the wall. click Align. select the dimension value. 18 Using the same technique. Select the bottom of the stair. Click Modify. select Wall faces. click Dimension. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Select the interior face of the wall. enter 1200 mm. Select the wall. and lock the alignment. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Lock the dimension.15 On the Tools toolbar. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. for Prefer. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

The stair and walls move to the left. 23 Select the stair.21 Select the dimension. 27 In the Type Selector. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. (Undo). and press DELETE. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . 24 On the Standard toolbar. clear Tag on Placement. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. select both reference planes. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 28 On the Options Bar. click Door. 25 While pressing CTRL. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. a warning displays. and press DELETE. Because the dimension is constrained. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. TIP To flip the door swing. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar.

click Align. (Default 3D View). click Modify. (Rectangle). select 00 Foundation. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. select all 4 walls. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. select 05 Roof Garden. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. for Base Constraint. 33 Select the stair. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 44 On the Tools toolbar.30 On the Design Bar. Click OK. (SteeringWheels). Under Constraints. under Floor Plans. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 35 On the View toolbar. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. (Element Properties). and move the cursor to spin the building model. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. For Top Constraint. click 36 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. Click OK. for Multistory Top Level. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. but if you view the top level of the building. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties).

and lock the alignment. on the View toolbar. click see the roof. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and lock the alignments.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). 52 In the Select Levels dialog. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. and click OK. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door.

click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 56 Select the shaft. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. By offsetting the base. (SteeringWheels). You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. double-click 01 Entry Level. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 59 On the View toolbar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. enter 300 mm. for Base Offset. Under Constraints. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. (Default 3D View). you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. ■ 58 On the View toolbar.55 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). For Top Constraint.

select 06 Roof.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Right-click in the view. under Graphics. click Training Files. double-click 05 Roof Garden. for Underlay. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties.rvt. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . click Wall. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. and click OK. under Floor Plans.

132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the right face of the wall. 16 On the Design Bar. click Edit Profile. and click (Fillet arc). and press ENTER. select Basic Wall : Generic .5 In the Type Selector. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). The exact placement is not important. and on the Options Bar. 15 In the error dialog. select Elevation: South. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. and click Open View. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 11 In the Go To View dialog. 17 On the Options Bar. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall.225mm Masonry. enter 9750. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. click Remove Constraints. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. click Lines. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click .

double-click {3D}. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . and click (Circle).18 In the upper right corner of the profile. under 3D Views. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. click . 22 In the Project Browser. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest.

Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134.

click Training Files. 5 On the Basics tab. between grid lines C and D. and press ESC twice. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. click Component. as shown. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 .rvt. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. 6 In the Type Selector.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Selector.5 Meters. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry .4. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP After you place the 1st planter. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. double-click 05 Roof Garden. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. select M_RPC Tree .

18 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar.5 Meters. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Japanese Cherry 1. View the roof. double-click 05 Roof Garden. select M_RPC Tree . Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). under Dimensions.5 Meters. and click OK. 11 Select one of the trees. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.8 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. and in the Type Selector. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. For Offset. click Edit/New. (Element Properties). click Duplicate. as shown. double-click 01 Entry Level. enter 1500 mm. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click {3D}. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. select the 2 remaining trees. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Name dialog. click (Default 3D View). 16 Click Apply.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. enter 2400 mm. 21 On the Design Bar. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. click Floor. for Height. click Lines. 17 While pressing CTRL. for Type. and then click OK twice. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof.

click (Draw). for Offset. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to place the line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . enter 0 mm. and click to sketch a line. and click to sketch a line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 25 Using the same method. 26 On the Options Bar.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 29 On the Options Bar.

36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. click (Trim/Extend).30 On the Options Bar. and click to finish the line. move the cursor up 900 mm. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 32 Press ESC. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. clear Chain. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and click to finish the line. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor.

click Finish Sketch. 43 Click OK twice. Next. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . under Constraints. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 49 On the Options Bar. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. In plan view.38 On the Design Bar. as shown: (Element Properties). click Edit/New. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. click Component. 42 In the Name dialog. The completed sidewalk displays. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Select the sidewalk. near Column E5. 48 In the Type Selector. and click so he is facing the column. select M_RPC Male : Alex. 45 Click OK. enter Sidewalk. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. for Height Offset from Level. select Rotate after placement. for Type. When you render an image. and on the Options Bar. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. enter -250 mm. a photorealistic image displays. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog.

and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 54 In the Type Selector. 52 In the Type Selector. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Camera. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 56 Press ESC twice. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). and click (Element Properties). select M_RPC Beetle. click the car.NOTE If necessary. about 30 degrees.

66 Using the same method. for Offset. 65 Click the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. and click OK.59 In the Element Properties dialog. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. When you select a host for a component. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. double-click To Building. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. Next. under 3D Views. click Pick Host. click Pick Host. If the sidewalk changes height. 63 Click the sidewalk. 60 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. 64 Select Alex. under Elevations. enter -300 mm. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. double-click West. both Cathy and Alex will move with it.

The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. After the service core is positioned. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. and replace them with a service core. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . the elements will be ungrouped in the project. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.

click Training Files. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the entire stairwell. and shaft opening. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. 5 On the View toolbar. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. click 6 On the View toolbar. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . walls.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. including the stairs. you delete the entire stairwell. click (Default 3D View). 4 Press DELETE. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core.rvt. (SteeringWheels). In the left pane of the Open dialog.

14 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. and on the Design Bar. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance.rvt. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. right-click m_RRB_core. click OK. expand Model. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. under Floor Plans. and notice that the linked file is listed. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click (Align). click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. click Training Files. expand Groups. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. under Floor Plans. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 13 In the drawing area. double-click 00 Foundation. and zoom in to the linked instance.

click Modify. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. or if the group layout is expected to change. and on the Options Bar. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). click 21 On the View toolbar. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. ■ ■ Click grid line C. and click to align the center. click Ungroup. (Default 3D View). 18 Select the core. 20 On the View toolbar. click (top down view). Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . click Modify.

click Training Files.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. where it is hosted within a railing family. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you modify it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146.rvt. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. you add glass railings around the floor edges. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

5 Expand Railing. click (Split). Handrail only. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and select Glass. and expand Railings. click OK. double-click 02 Level. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. expand Families. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. in the Project Browser.rvt. click Edit. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. expand Renderings.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. press and hold CTRL. click Training Files. 3 In the Conference project. and double-click Lounge Perspective. and on the Options Bar. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. and click to split the floor. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and Parapet. and open Metric\m_Conference. The rendering displays. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . The floor sketch displays.rvt. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor.15 On the Design Bar. 25 Select grid line B. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and click to draw another line. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click Lines. click (Align). and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click Modify. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. and click to draw another line. and on the Options Bar. verify that Chain is not selected. and click to place it.

31 In the Revit dialog. and lock the alignment. click Railing Properties. click Railing. For Offset. click Finish Sketch. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. click Dimension. select Glass. and click OK. click (Align).rvt project. 30 On the Design Bar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. and click the lock to lock the alignment. Lock the dimensions. 33 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. for Type. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 29 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown.26 Select grid line D. enter 100 mm.

37 On the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. 39 Click Finish Sketch. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Dimension. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

lofty ceilings. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. 153 . Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. and a roof garden. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. slight modifications to the building design have been made. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. exterior fire stairs. NOTE For training purposes. balconies.

154 .

You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you learn how to create views from a building model. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. section. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. elevation. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 155 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn how to create new views from existing views. how to create section and elevation views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. including plan. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files.

9 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Level 2. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK.2 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 4 In the Project Browser.

click the current scale. and click 1: 1000. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 11 Under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan. 12 In the Rename View dialog.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan. Next.

rvt. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 16 Right-click.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.

under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Building Elevation.rvt. double-click Level 1. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. for Scale. select 1:100.

click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.

click Section. under Views (all).Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. select 1:100. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 11 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. for Scale. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor down. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. under Elevations (Building Elevation). enter South East. select Section: Building Section.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. Click the midpoint of the section line. click Split Segment. and click to place it. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

21 On the Design Bar. 24 Select gridline F. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 23 On the View Control Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. expand Sections (Building Section). click Modify. and double-click Section 1. using the blue circular drag grip. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .25 On the Design Bar. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. To create each view. click Modify. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.

Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. double-click Level 1. select 1:50. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan. for Scale.Resulting callout view . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Callout. Creating Callout Views | 167 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Selector. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair.rvt.

click Modify.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and select the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. ■ Select the middle grip.

select Detail View: Detail. double-click Section 1. Creating Callout Views | 169 . for Scale. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. click Callout. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.7 On the Design Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 14 On the Options Bar. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 9 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 13 In the Type Selector. under Sections (Building Sections). select 1:50. and click OK.

16 Modify the callout leader as shown. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

enter Roof Overhang Detail. expand Detail Views (Details). under Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 171 . 18 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.17 In the Project Browser.

you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. You change the appearance of the section mark head. under Floor Plans. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. the elevation markers. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. and click Open. double-click Level 1. select Custom-Section Head. open Metric\Families\Annotations.

scroll to Section Marks.Filled. and click OK.5mm Square. select Section Head . Section Tail – Filled. clear any others. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . On the floor plan. 12 For Section Tag.Custom. click Duplicate. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK twice. 4 On the Design Bar. and select 2. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. click Edit/New. for Section Head. select the current project. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. select the section line. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. enter 12. and click OK. 17 Under Category. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. . and click OK. 10 On the floor plan. and can be applied to the section line. and select 3. click Duplicate. 21 In the Type Properties dialog.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. scroll to Section Line. 19 Click OK. Section Tail . enter Section Head – Custom. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 15 Under Category. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. click Load into Project. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.

under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. select 3. Click OK. 34 In the Name dialog. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. . The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. notice the square elevation markers that display. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. and click OK. select Square. click Edit/New. and click Open. .5mm Square. click Training Files. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. 36 In the drawing. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Edit/New. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 6 mm. for Callout Tag.5 mm. 40 Press ESC. select the current project. and click OK. and on the Options Bar.23 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 Click OK twice. 39 Click OK twice. select 12. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Load into Project. open Metric\Families\Annotations. clear all others. select the callout. and on the Options Bar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head.rfa. click Duplicate. select Custom-Callout Head. Click OK. For Corner Radius. For Dimensions ➤ Width. for Elevation Tag. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 12. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. On the floor plan. For Line Weight. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.

and select 4. view regions. You learn to create view templates. and select 7. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . filters. 46 Under Category. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 45 For Line Pattern. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. 47 Select Callout Leader Line.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 43 Under Category. and visual overrides. select Dash. masking regions. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 49 Click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. expand Callout Boundary. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field.

Creating a View Template In this exercise. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. under Elevations. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. click Training Files. 5 On the View Control Bar. and apply it to multiple elevation views. click Zoom to Fit. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View Toolbar. 2 On the View Control Bar. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click (Hide Crop Region). 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and double-click East. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The crop region displays as red.rvt. To accomplish this. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. click (Show Crop Region).

Creating a View Template | 177 . and section lines are now hidden in the view. elevation markers.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. Callouts. clear Entourage. levels. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 11 Under Visibility. 13 On the View Control bar. grids. under Visibility. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

click OK. edit the crop region as before. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 20 Using the same method. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click North. under Elevations. and click Create View Template From View. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. and click OK. under Elevations.14 In the Project Browser. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Apply View Template. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 15 In the New View Template dialog.rvt. click Apply. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. double-click North. 17 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the View Templates dialog. right-click East. and click OK.

you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Floor Plans. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . for Level. Click OK twice. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Extents. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. select Level Below (Level 4). NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. right-click. Under View Depth. double-click Penthouse. and click Properties. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Bottom. select Penthouse.rvt. select Level Below (Level 4). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. for View Range. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit.

Click OK twice. 6 In the Project Browser. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Edit. select Roof Plan. under Extents. for View Range. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. select Level 4. under Floor Plans. select Level 4.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. for Level. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. double-click Roof Plan. right-click. for Bottom.

15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. Click OK twice. under Extents. for Level. select Unlimited. for View Range. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. In the left corner of the building.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Bottom. Under View Depth. 11 On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . click Edit. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Lines. click Plan Region. Move you cursor diagonally. click Finish Sketch. select Unlimited. 10 On the Design Bar.

rvt.17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. expand Floor Plans. under Views (all). the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. in this case. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and double-click Level 1. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Filters tab. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. After you apply the filter. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the fire rating of the walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters.

15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 11 Select Rated Walls. 17 Using the same method. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . select Walls. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 10 On the Filter tab. click Add. and click OK. 5 In the Filters dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. and click OK. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Categories. click Edit/New. select Fire Rating. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click Override under Patterns. 7 In the Filters dialog. Enter Hr. click (New).4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Solid Fill. under Basic colors. Select contains. for Pattern. under Filters. 16 Click OK. under Projection/Surface. select the red color. and apply a color. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. enter Rated Walls. for Color. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click Remove. click <No Override>. for Rated Walls. click OK. 9 Click OK. 14 In the Color dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. and click OK. 12 On the Filter tab.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.

6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. and click Rename. 1 In the Project Browser. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 11 In the Type Selector. select Invisible lines. 8 Select the crop region. 7 On the View menu. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 9 On the View Control Bar. right-click. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region. as shown. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 2 Select Copy of Level 1.rvt. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. under Floor Plans.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. click Masking Region. 5 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.12 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click (Rectangle). 14 On the Design Bar. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

select Solid fill. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.Level 1. and click Override. under Visibility. and click OK. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. under Floor Plans. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click OK. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 .Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. under Pattern Overrides. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and click 1: 50. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 7 Under Cut. for Pattern. and click Rename. select Walls. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click the current scale. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. click <No Override> to apply a color. 11 Click OK twice. for Color. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. click in the Patterns field. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. right-click. click black.

14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. under Visibility. 16 Under Visibility. click Modify. clear Grids. clear Floors. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .

select the sofa. click Override. under Lines. 23 In the Color dialog. click Projection Lines.20 Right-click. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. for Pattern. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. By using the previous method to make the selection. click <No Override> to apply a color. right-click. and click OK. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Color. click a purple color. 21 Under Projection/Surface. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Dash.

click . 30 On the Design Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color.28 For Color. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. select a bright green color. click By Category Override. 29 In the Color dialog. and click OK twice. right-click. click Modify. 32 Select one of the lamps.

you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. click . 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. how to add views to the sheets.33 On the View Control Bar.

rvt. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Training Files. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Sheet. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK.Creating Sheets. select A0 metric. right-click. and click View. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar.

194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . on the Options Bar. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. For Sheet Number. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter A101.Unnamed. 5 When the title block highlights. 3 In the Project Browser. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . click Modify. For Sheet Name. click Modify. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). enter Site Plan. and select the title block.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 7 On the Design Bar. Click OK.

Smith. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter J. For Client Name. 2009. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. For Project Status. The new project information displays in the titleblock. For Project Name.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. for Project Address. 14 Click OK. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter 15 May. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter For Approval. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. MA 12345 12 Click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . under Other. enter 2009-1. For Project Number.

Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Elevations A107 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. enter Floor Plan. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. and click Rename.Elevations A105 .Elevations A106 . right-click. you add views to these sheets. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 17 In the Project Browser. and click Save. select the new sheet name. for Name.Sections A108 . 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . select A0 metric.Stairs In the following exercise.Layout Plan A104 .

The red border around the view no longer displays. under Floor Plans.Floor Plan. select Level 1. double-click A102 . and click to place the view. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Sheets (all). The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.Elevations. 2 In the Project Browser. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click to place it. click Modify. under Sheets (all). double-click A104 . and drag it to the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 4 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet.

7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.Sections. under Sheets (all). 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. double-click A107 . 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. align it with the East elevation. click Modify. and click to place it. 12 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. and press TAB until it highlights. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. zoom in to the grip. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and on the Options Bar. move the cursor over it. 16 Select title bar. . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Scale. select 1:5. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet.

and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. double-click Level 1. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 18 Under Floor Plans. 19 On the Design Bar.Stairs. and click to place it. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Floor Plans. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. double-click A108 .

zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. right-click. and then make changes and deactivate the view.rvt. and press ENTER. and click Activate View.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. click Modify. enter 16700 mm. double-click A107 . Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the building section view. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.Sections. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 On the Design Bar. you must first activate the view on the sheet. under Sheets (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. In order to do this.

After you create the sheet. You modify the view to hide the view title.rvt. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. double-click North. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Deactivate View. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated.6 Right-click. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. double-click Level 1. select A0 metric.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. The camera view displays. click Camera. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter Title Sheet. enter T. Click OK. right-click. 3 In the Project Browser. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . 7 Place the camera as shown. and click OK. select the new sheet name. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. For Sheet Name.

enter 100000 mm. For Target Elevation. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. enter 1500 mm. enter 18000 mm. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). 14 Under 3D Views. for Eye Elevation. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. Under Extents. select Far Clip Active. double-click T . Click OK. For Far Clip Offset.Title Sheet. Under Camera. 13 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View Control Bar. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.8 On the Options Bar. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .

25 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Name dialog. click Modify. Under Model Crop Size. select No. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. . and click OK. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. for Show title. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . click Duplicate. Click Apply. 24 Click OK twice. 19 Select the view on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. under Graphics. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. for Height. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 635 mm. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. on the Options Bar.15 With the view selected. enter Viewport/no title mark. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select Scale (locked proportions). and then click OK. click Size. click Modify.

206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Because of the open style floor plan. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects.Level 1. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . You also learn to create different types of schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as doors and windows. click Training Files. Tagging Objects In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. expand Floor Plans. such as room and window schedules. 207 . Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor to the right. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click Room and Area. click Room Separation. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. right-click in the Design Bar.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. as shown: 5 Using the same method. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left.

click Modify. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . 9 In the Tags dialog. click Load. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.6 Using the same method. 7 On the Design Bar.

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. click OK. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. indicating that it can be edited. click Training Files. 16 On the Design Bar.rfa. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room. 14 For Offset. The room tag number displays in blue. click Modify. and select the room tag. and click to place the room and tag.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and press ENTER. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. click it. 13 On the Options Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag. 11 In the Tags dialog. type 2400 mm. type U18-1.

Click to place the new room and tag. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Room. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet.18 Click the room text label. 22 Click the room text label. and press ENTER. Dining. 23 Using the same method. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Sequential letters are also supported. place rooms and tags. type Kitchen. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. click Modify. type Entry. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . and press ENTER. 19 On the Design Bar.

29 On the Design Bar. The rooms are already placed.Level 2. clear Room Separation. expand Lines. click Modify. but they need to be tagged. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. on the Model Categories tab. and moving clockwise. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Unit 18 Plan . and click OK.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 27 On the Design Bar. click Room Tag. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. under Floor Plans. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).

clear Leader. 3 On the Options Bar.Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Tag ➤ By Category. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. in the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. you learn how to place door and window tags.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

and press ENTER. 101-106. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . type Corridor. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 103. The room Number is U17-46. for room 101. select Storage. For 102. 10 Edit the number to be 101. 11 Using the same method. and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. type Storage. and press ENTER. select Corridor. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. click New.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. add 5 more rooms. for Name. For 105. type Building Entry. next to Rows. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. For 104.

place rooms from a program list. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. under Visibility. type Stair. 4 Click OK twice. and click OK. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add room separation lines. double-click Level 1. expand Lines. under Projection/Surface. Under Custom colors. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. click the Color field. click Override. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. click the bright green swatch. In the Lines field. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. For Room Separation. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Floor Plans. click the Lines field. For Weight. and press ENTER.rvt. 13 Save the file. select 9.■ For 106. In the Line Graphics dialog. and modify room names.

click Room. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . click Modify. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. draw the horizontal line. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Room Separation. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. First. 9 On the Design Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). type 2400 mm. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room. select 101 Building Entry.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. for Room. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 For Offset. select 102 Storage.

under Schedules/Quantities. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Room Schedule. click Modify.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. 20 While pressing CTRL. and zoom in to the Corridor. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 17 On the Design Bar. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). under Floor Plans. place the following rooms. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 16 Using the same method. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen.

31 For Key Name. type As Selected. and click Add. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. under Category. Floor Finish. while pressing CTRL. and for all 3 finishes. click New. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click 23 On the Design Bar. select Rooms. and click OK. (Element Properties).21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. click Schedule/Quantities. and Wall Finish. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify. 24 Open the Room Schedule. select Base Finish. for Rows. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select Schedule keys. under Available fields. 30 On the Options Bar. and click OK. type Units. under Constraints. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. clear Room Bounding.

select Units. under Floor Plans. add 2 more key names: Service and Public.32 Using the same method. and click OK. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . 38 Under U17-8. under Other. click (Element Properties). for Available fields. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. right-click Room Schedule. select Units. 37 Open the Room Schedule. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. click Edit. for Fields. double-click Level 1. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. select Rooms. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. for Room Style. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. 43 In the Filter dialog. select Room Style. 44 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. 36 Click OK twice. click Check None. under Schedules/Quantities. 42 On the Options Bar. and click Properties.

104. (Duplicate). type Room Type. 48 Save the file.46 Open the Room Schedule. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. under Views (all). Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Service. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. click the Color Scheme field. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. click OK. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. and click OK. right-click Level 1. at the warning prompt. For rooms 102 and 105. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. and 106. expand Floor Plans. type Room Type. for Name. select Public. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). click 5 For Title.rvt. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Room Style. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 103. and double-click Level 1. for Color. under Graphics. and apply it to the Level 1 view. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click OK.

14 Click OK twice. select Room Type.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . click Color Scheme Legend. 17 On the Design Bar. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click the value in the Color column. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click Edit. under Visibility. under Schemes. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. clear Visible. and clear Room Separation. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). click Modify. click Edit Color Scheme. expand Lines. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. select the color legend. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. When you move the cursor over the drawing area.

29 Click OK twice. and click OK. type 25 mm.22 In the Color dialog. for Size. 30 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK. for Swatch Width. 23 Using the same method. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. select blue. respectively. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. click Edit/New. click Modify. under Custom color. under Graphics. on the Options Bar. type 5 mm. (Element Properties). 28 Under Title Text.

Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. and select Properties. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 35 Click OK twice. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . and click OK. under Graphics. under Visibility. click Color Scheme Legend. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Room Type. under Sections. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. click Edit. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. right-click Building Section. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. double-click Building Section. under Sections. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. for Color Scheme.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser.

(Filter Selection). under Identity Data. select Rooms. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). and click OK. for Room Style. and click OK. click Check None. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Public. select Units. click . 41 On the Options Bar. 46 Click . 45 While pressing CTRL.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Identity Data. for Room Style. and click OK. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Filter dialog. select all the rooms in the stairwell. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.

type Suites. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. excluding the stairwell spaces. under Identity Data. double-click Room Style Schedule. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . and click . click New. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. under Schedules/Quantities. for Rows.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. for Room Style. 54 While pressing CTRL. under Key Name for the new row. and click OK. 51 On the Options Bar. select Service. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. 49 In the Element Properties dialog.

Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. The color fill extends to the roof. under Identity Data. select Suites.55 Click . select Areas and Volumes. under Volume Computations. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. but not beyond it. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. The color fill will extend to the roof. and click OK. 59 Under Room Area Computation. for Room Style. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that At wall finish is selected.

type 0. 67 On the first level. 72 On the Design Bar. select Loft. 71 Click OK. for Upper Limit. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). the dining room. type -254 mm. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. select the stairwell room. select Level 2. 68 Click .0. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . 70 For Limit Offset.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. . click Modify. under Constraints. for Upper Limit. 66 Click OK. under Constraints. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. and click 65 For Limit Offset. and the living room.

under 3D Views.73 Save the file. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. double-click {3D}. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.rvt. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.

6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.Insulation on Plywood Deck . click Modify. select Family and Type. and click Add. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 4 In the Type Selector.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 3 While pressing CTRL. under Category. click Family and Type. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. For Then by. under Available fields. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 9 Using the same method.EPDM. select Material: Description. Select Grand totals. Clear Itemize every instance. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Roofs. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. for Fields. and click OK twice. 17 Click Calculated Value. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. select Material: Area. select Calculate totals. select Material: Cost. 12 Click OK. 23 For Field formatting.40 50. click the Formatting tab. and click Properties. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Currency. for Name. for Material: Cost. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. under Other. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. click Edit. under Available fields. and click Add. 19 For Type. and under Fields. Under Field formatting. click Estimated Cost. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. type Estimated Cost. 21 Click OK. 20 For Formula. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 31 Save the file. ensuring consistency across families and projects. These shared parameters can be added to any family. creating a generic tag to tag the family. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. In this lesson. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. tag the line. Digit grouping. for Currency. not just for currency. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. either within family components or within the project template. 28 For Unit symbol. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . 26 In the Project Units dialog. You draw a travel path line. 27 In the Format dialog. 29 Select Use digit grouping. which inserts commas after every three digits. and schedule the total distance of each path. and reporting the shared parameters. click the Format value. you create a shared parameter file. can be used for any number-based parameter. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. adding the shared parameters to a family. you create an exiting plan for the building.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. regardless of category. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. for Rounding. select $. and are defined and stored in an external file. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. 30 Click OK twice. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson.

3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. for Type of Parameter. type Path ID. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. click New. and click OK.rvt. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. type Exiting. type OfficeStandardsParameters. under Groups. for File name. select Length. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Training Files. type Travel Distance. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. and click Save. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. under Floor Plans. click New. for Name. for Name. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 7 Under Parameters. 11 Click OK twice.txt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Name. and click OK. click New. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Under Parameters. click Create. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

for Travel Distance Formula. under Parameter Data. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and select Instance.rfa. 8 Select Instance. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and click Select. 9 In the Family Types dialog. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. select Shared parameter. 13 Click Apply. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. click Family Types. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . and click OK. click Add. in the Load into Projects dialog. following the equals symbol (=). 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Family Types dialog.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 10 Using the same method. under Parameters. and click OK. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 12 In the Family Types dialog. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. otherwise the family loads into the current project. If you have multiple projects open. type Length. select Constraints. and click OK. under Parameters. under Parameter Type. and click OK. click Add.rvt. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 Click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. group it under Dimensions. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. under Dimensions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Click Training Files. for Group parameter under. 15 If necessary. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 3 On the Design Bar.

25 In the Edit Label dialog. select Travel Distance. select Travel Distance. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Label. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes.rft. 24 Click OK twice.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. click Training Files. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click Select. and click OK. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Label. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Category Parameters. click parameter(s) to label). under Parameters. click (Add Parameter). (Add 26 On the Design Bar.

type M_Travel Distance Tag. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. for File Name. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. click Modify. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 32 In the Save As dialog. and move it down. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.rvt is selected. 33 On the Design Bar.28 On the Design Bar.rfa. and click Save. and click OK. click Load into Projects. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. and press DELETE. 29 In the drawing window. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 35 Save the file. select Path ID.

Tagging.Level 1. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.Placing. above the exterior door as shown. select Chain. and click in the center of the corridor. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. under Floor Plans. click Component. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. After the lines are tagged. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click Exiting Plan . 6 Move the cursor to the right.

move the cursor near the right corner. click Modify. Placing. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties).7 Move the cursor down. through the door. 12 On the Design Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 17 On the Options Bar. double click Exiting Plan .Level 2. and click outside of the building. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. for Path ID. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Component. under Constraints. 13 While pressing CTRL. select the 2 dashed travel lines. click Modify. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan.Tagging. under Floor Plans. clear Leader. verify that Chain is selected. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. type 1-1. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 .

and click above the door to the stair. click Component. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. and click in the stair. 21 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 20 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor down. click Modify. move the cursor to the left. and click.

under Category. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. type Level 1 Exit Distance. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. under Constraints. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. Placing.24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 28 While pressing CTRL. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Design Bar. . click Modify. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. type 2-1. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 30 Using the same method. for Path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . click Modify. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 33 For Name.

and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Rename. type 1-. 49 Click OK twice. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. under Other. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 44 In the Project Browser. 38 For Sort by. 46 In the Project Browser. and under Field formatting. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 50 Save the file. 43 In the Project Browser. type 2-. select Path ID. 36 For Filter by. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.rvt. under Schedules/Quantities. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. in the third field. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 45 In the Rename View dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 41 Under Fields. click Edit. select Travel Distance. and click OK. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. and in the third field. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. select Calculate totals. for Filter. click Training Files. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. for Filter by. select contains. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. under Available fields. 42 Click OK. 35 Click the Filter tab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in the first field. while pressing CTRL. and click Add. 40 Click the Formatting tab. select Path ID. in the second field.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click View.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. select the following fields. 9 Click OK twice.Interiors ➤ C10 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Under Available fields. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . click the Value field.152 mm. for Assembly Code. and click . under Identity Data.Partitions . under Categories. click Schedule/Quantities.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and select C1010145 . right-click the Design Bar. 10 In the schedule.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. expand C . and click Properties. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. and click OK. right-click Generic . select Walls.Fixed Partitions. click the Fields tab.

11 Click OK 3 times. 8 In the New Database dialog. for Database Name. the database display may be different than that shown. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. and click Next. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click New. 9 Under Directories. type Revit_Project.mdb). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. under Database. 6 Click Finish.rvt. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.mdb. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. click the File Data Source tab. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog.11 Close the exercise file. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click OK to create the database. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 1 On the File menu. and click Next. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select a location for the database file. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. click Training Files. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click Create.

Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 .Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. For example. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. in addition to the Id column. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Additionally. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. 13 Close the exercise file. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter.

262 .

you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. 263 . You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

Detailing 7 In this tutorial. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. and metal studs. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. plywood. you trace over the building model geometry. add detail components. These components display at the required scale. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. like a standard door header condition. In order to detail from the building model. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. In the callout view. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. 297 .

click Yes to load a Detail Items family. Exact location is not important. which means that all detail components. double-click the detail callout head. region objects. click Training Files. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. as well as detail lines. The roof overhang detail displays. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. you detail the view of the roof edge. 5 In the alert dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. select As underlay. click Training Files. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. After you add components. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. click Detail Component. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and click OK. and insulation objects.rvt. You load detail components. and click Open. 7 In the drawing area.rfa. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Detailing the View In this exercise. They are also view specific. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

click Edit/New. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. and click OK. 15 For Spacing.8 Delete the component. for Pattern ➤ Detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. Detailing the View | 299 .5mm. 19 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Repeating Detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 In the Name dialog. enter 406. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click (Element Properties). Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. select Corrugated Metal. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 16 Click OK twice. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.

20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 24 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. and click Open. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. click Load. 22 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point.rfa. ■ ■ Click Modify. click (Move). 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click Training Files.

28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 30 In the Type Selector. Detailing the View | 301 . press SPACEBAR 3 times. click OK. 33 In the Type Selector.Because you still have several components to load. click Training Files. you load them as a group from a single file. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Detail Component. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. and place it in the detail view as shown. and click Open. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.rvt. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 31 To properly orient the component. 29 On the Design Bar.

37 Click Modify. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click Modify.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. click the Flip instance arrows. 35 On the Options Bar. select Chain. 38 Select the horizontal segment. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm.

42 Click Modify. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. select to near side. and on the Edit toolbar. as shown. click Detail Component. click Insulation. Detailing the View | 303 . Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. click (Move). ■ Click Modify. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. For Offset. enter 140mm. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation.

and lock the component. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. you add lines to your detail.rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. select Thin Lines. they are view specific. as shown. click Detail Lines. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. Like detail components. 51 Click Modify. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.45 In the Type Selector. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. meaning they display only in this view. 47 In the Type Selector. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the Type Selector.

drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. enter 10mm. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset.4 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. click Detail Lines. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 7 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Design Bar. For Offset. as shown. as shown. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Thin Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. Adding Detail Lines | 305 .

Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. and clear Chain. as shown. click (Draw). and draw the detail lines as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.

Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. select Do not display. select the Penthouse level line.18 In the Type Selector. 24 On the View Control Bar. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. enter 10mm. draw the detail lines as shown. select Vapor Barrier. 26 In the Type Selector. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). When you turn the display model off. right-click. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. and press ENTER. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. For Offset. and click OK. Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and click Properties. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 22 In the Project Browser.

click Detail Component. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Adding Text Notes on page 308. select M_Break Line. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. press SPACEBAR as necessary. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. you add text notes to complete the detail. 34 Proceed to the next exercise.29 On the Design Bar. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 32 Click Modify. Adding Text Notes In this exercise.

Click again to specify the location of the text box.rvt. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. and click to place the dimension. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. click Text. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 6 Click Modify. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Enter the text. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Dimension.

Creating Detail Components on page 310. right-click. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. click Select All Instances. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and click OK. select a text note. for Suffix. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.7 Select the dimension line. click Roof Overhang Detail. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Text Fields. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter Typ. and press DELETE. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click Rename. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rvt. and save the exercise file. and click the dimension text. right-click. and click OK. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Options Bar.. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. (Filter Selection).Keynotes. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. Creating Detail Components In this exercise.

15 Use a window to select all linework. and click Open. and selecting the chain. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 14 Click Modify. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. while pressing CTRL. click Training Files. 16 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component.rft. select all the coping linework. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. in the Type Selector. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.7 Click Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. pressing TAB. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 8 Zoom in to the metal coping.

click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping.Keynotes view is not the open view. clear Detail Items. click Load into Projects. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. While pressing SHIFT. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected.rfa. 25 In the Filter dialog. select the coping. navigate to your preferred location. double-click it in the Project Browser. 28 On the Options Bar. Adding Keynotes on page 312. for File name. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 31 Using the same method used previously. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 30 In the drawing area. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them.18 In the Save As dialog. click Load. delete the underlying linework. click Detail Component. 21 To place the component. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. and click Save. 24 On the Options Bar. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and the component can be placed in the detail. 23 Using a window. and click Open. you place keynotes on objects. 22 Click Modify. The original linework remains selected. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click . 26 Press DELETE. enter Roof Edge.

navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. click Training Files. (Element Properties). Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. Roof Edge4. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the Keynotes dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. use keynote 07645.rfa. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 6 Click Modify. 2 In the alert dialog. For the metal coping. Click to place the leader arm. 63mm Rigid Insulation. select the metal fascia with drip edge.D11. click Keynote ➤ Element. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.C1. click Edit/New. and click OK. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.rvt. use keynote 06160. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 19mm Plywood. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Adding Keynotes | 313 . Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. and click Open.B5. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.

use keynote 06160. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. 11 Click OK 3 times. 12 On the Design Bar. 22mm Corrugated Steel . select Corrugated Metal. For the 50 x 200. and click .D1. use keynote 06110. use keynote 06110. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. use keynote 06110. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. For the 50 x 150. click Keynote ➤ Element.A8. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Save the file. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.D11. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. For the 50 x 300. FasciaProfile_1.G1. 17 Keynote the component. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. You do this in order to keynote the component. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.20 Ga. using keynote 07460.9 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 15 In the Type Selector.I1. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. navigate to 07645.F1. click in the Value column.F1. use keynote 09250. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.

select Medium Lines. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . navigate to your preferred location. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. click Load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 15 Click Modify. and click Open. select Medium Line Detail Component. 16 Select the component. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector. 11 Press DELETE.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. click Training Files. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Modify. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for File name. click Edit/New. and select the right end point. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and click Save. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rft. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. and click Open. 13 In the Type Selector. click Load into Projects. and click (Element Properties). click Duplicate. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 5 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 19 In the Name dialog. 24 While pressing CTRL. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 20 Click OK 3 times. 6 Lock the line. select the left end point of the reference line. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.

34 In the Name dialog. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click in the Value column. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. and click the lower end at the break line. 31 Select the component. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and hidden) used in the view. click Detail Component. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. click Edit/New. 41 Select the component just added. 47 Select the component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and click . enter EPDM Membrane. 40 Click Modify. 37 Click OK 3 times. click Duplicate. and assign it keynote 07260. on the Edit toolbar. 38 On the Design Bar. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. click (Move). 29 In the drawing area. and click . Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 48 Using the same method used previously.25 Next. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 28 In the Type Selector. 46 Click Modify. click Detail Component.G1. 30 Click Modify.A5. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. invisible. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 44 On the Design Bar. 42 Using the same method used previously. 49 With the component selected. and click OK. select m_Light Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. against the 19mm plywood. and click . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 27 On the Design Bar. name the component Air Barrier.A1. and assign it keynote 06110. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. and click .

54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. and click . Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 .Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Type Selector. select Chain. 53 On the Options Bar. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 55 Click Modify. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. leaving the detail component lines.

68 In the drawing area. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rfa. name the component Vapor Barrier. Air Barrier.rfa. click Load into Projects.A4. 67 In the Type Selector. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select Invisible Lines.58 Using the method used previously. and Vapor Barrier. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. and assign it keynote 07260. click Detail Component. in the Type Selector. 50 x 200 Framing. 63 In the drawing area. select the component. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 61 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Element. 60 On the Design Bar. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.

Enter 07460. click File menu ➤ Save. and assign it keynote 07210. and press TAB. 3 In the text editor. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 71 In the drawing area. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . 72 Save the file. name the component Batt Insul. The database file opens in a text editor.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. add a keynote for the component. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. and click . and close the text editor. under Keynote Table. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. click Browse.A1.txt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and press ENTER. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.A4. and press TAB. 70 Using the method used previously. Enter 07463. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise.69 Select the component.A9. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. 73 Proceed to the next exercise.

7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 13 Click Modify. Each keynote displays as a simple number. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. select Absolute. and click OK. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click Open. After you create a drafting view. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 14 Save the file. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). These details do not update with changes to the building model. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. navigate to 07463. click to place the leader.txt. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 9 In the drawing area. 11 Click Modify. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. click Keynote ➤ Element. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. select all the keynotes. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. and click to place the note. In the Type Selector. under Path Type. you learn how to create a drafted detail.A1. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and click OK. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library.

Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. click Training Files.dwg. for Scale. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and click OK.Center to Center is selected. select 1 : 5. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail.rvt. right-click Drafting 1. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. For Positioning. For Colors. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Click Open. The detail that you import is in DWG format. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.rvt. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . 7 In the Rename View dialog. select Black and White. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. enter EPDM Metal Coping. 6 In the Project Browser. verify that Auto . and click Rename. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.

The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 10 In the Rename dialog. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. enter Detail . under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 12 Click OK twice. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. for New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. click Edit/New.No Reference. click Callout. delete the existing value. click Rename. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. select Reference other view.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 6 Select the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click Modify.

The callout is updated with the sheet information. 18 Save the file. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. click Modify. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view./Sect. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.Elev. double-click A105 . There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail .No Reference). and double-click the callout./Det. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Name. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Gyp.rvt. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Edit/New. Board. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Duplicate. 5 In the Type Selector. 14 Click OK 3 times. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. . select Gypsum-Plaster. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. click Region Properties. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and click OK. 11 In the Name dialog. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. for Name. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 3 On the View Control Bar. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it.

click 22 On the Options Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . and on the Edit toolbar. select the left and bottom edges of the region. click (Draw).5mm. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. select Wide Lines. 16 Select the left edge of the region.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. select the width dimension. (Mirror). 20 On the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. and enter 20. click Finish Sketch. 17 Click Modify. click . Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point.

click Edit/New. and click OK. Move the cursor up. for Name. 24 Select the mirrored region. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 30 In the Name dialog. 25 Click Modify.Finish. 33 Click OK 3 times. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Finish. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. enter Wood . click Duplicate. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. select Wood .23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.

34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. click (Align). in the Type Selector. 37 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. verify that the thickness is 19mm. sketch the new region as shown. click . Draw a rectangle as shown. click Filled Region. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150.5mm. select Medium Lines. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 39 In the Type Selector. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. and select the right edge of the wood region. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click (Rectangle). 38 On the Design Bar.

50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click 48 Click Modify. click Filled Region. enter 6mm. click Finish Sketch. and press ENTER. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. For Offset.42 On the Design Bar. For Offset. and press ENTER. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 47 Click the reference plane. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. (Align). click Ref Plane. 46 On the Tools toolbar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region.

and press ENTER. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and select the bottom horizontal line. Move the cursor left 25mm. 56 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor right 25mm. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. enter 0. click Finish Sketch. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. For Offset. 54 On the Tools toolbar.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Move the cursor down 305mm. click (Trim/Extend). Select Chain. and click to select the point. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch.

rfa. 69 Select the bolt. top. enter 3mm. and press ENTER. enter 76. For Offset. click Load. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 61 Click Modify.2mm. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 60 Select the left. and press ENTER.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 65 On the Options Bar. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. select the height dimension. 62 Select the left detail line. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 68 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. and click Open. click Detail Component. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and right edges of the door panel region. 58 In the Type Selector. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Training Files.

71 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. click Load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. and click Open. select Wide Lines. click Training Files. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Component. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 76 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. use the images as a guide.rfa. 74 Select the expansion bolt.70 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown.

86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. 80 On the Options Bar. click . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. select Thin Lines. 84 On the Design Bar. 87 Click Modify. (Mirror). 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines. click . 85 On the Options Bar. 82 Select the rectangle. 79 In the Type Selector. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. and on the Edit toolbar.78 On the Design Bar.

drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. as shown. click (Mirror). and on the Edit toolbar. 92 Select the line. 90 In the Type Selector. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 89 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . click Detail Lines.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. select Medium Lines.

TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. enter 3mm.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click Detail Component. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 102 In the Type Selector. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 99 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. 103 Add two break lines as shown. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. select M_Break Line. click . and press ENTER. select the length dimension. 95 On the Design Bar. 101 On the Design Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. 97 On the Options Bar.

105 In the drawing area.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. 107 On the Design Bar. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 108 In the Type Selector. 106 Click to place the dimension. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. click Dimension. using the Drag Text grip. and click Modify. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . click Dimension. drag the text for the smaller dimension.5mm Arial. 110 Select the dimension line.

112 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. for Below. click Dimension. enter See Schedule. under Dimension Value. 114 Click OK. 118 Select Modify to end the command. and enter Varies. 113 Under Text Fields. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and then click the dimension text. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . and click the dimension text.2.5mmArial. under Dimension Value. select Replace With Text. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. select Replace With Text. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions.

Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 127 Enter Gyp. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 128 Select the note. click Text. 125 In the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar.121 Click OK. and click Modify. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. and click to place the text. select the gypsum board region on the left. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. Board. click to create an arced leader. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 126 In the drawing area. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 123 Click OK.

click Modify to end the command.131 On the Design Bar. 132 Save the file. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

rvt. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 339 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. click Training Files. and double-click East. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Creating a Note Block In this exercise.

click Training Files. click Modify. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type 1.rfa. for Number of Leaders. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.Hexagon. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 5 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the keynote.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Symbol. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.

click (Element Properties). 13 Select the tag. and click above the tag to place the copy. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. type Seal existing doors and insulate. Creating a Note Block | 341 . under Identity Data.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click OK. 12 On the Edit toolbar. on the Options Bar. click (Copy). for Text.

click Copy. 15 For Text. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 18 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. 16 For Tag. and click. 17 Click OK. type B. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. click (Element Properties). 19 With the tag selected. type Repair existing door surround. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .14 With the copy selected. and on the Options Bar. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. on the Edit toolbar. (Mirror).

Repair as required. 22 Optionally. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Repair existing door surround. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. and moving counter-clockwise. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. using the table as a reference. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Remove all existing windows. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. click Modify. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate.21 On the Design Bar.

type Exterior Construction Notes. On the Appearance tab. verify that Arial is selected. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK. type 6 mm. type Description. for the value. for Heading. format. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 29 In the Project Browser. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and drag it to the sheet. and select Bold. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. for Note block name. select Tag. and for Alignment. and double-click A103 . Clean cut and repair wall as required. 27 In the column header (text). 26 Click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click Add. Select Text. and click Add. type Mark.Elevations.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. for Sort by. select Tag. for Header text. On the Formatting tab. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Center. expand Sheets (all). Create. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. select Exterior Construction Notes. 28 In the Project Browser. under Available fields.

31 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Modify. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.rvt.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. double-click T . 1 In the Project Browser. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project.Title Sheet. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.

and expand the right column to accommodate the text. under Available fields. under Sheets (all). change Drawing List to Sheet Index. select does not equal. Select Sheet Name. in the first field. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Sheet Number. select Sheet Number. 7 In the Project Browser. type T. in the second field. select Sheet Number. and click Add. and in the third field. 6 In the Project Browser. for Filter by. expand Schedules/Quantities. double-click T . and click Add. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for Sort by. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The drawing list displays.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. ■ 4 Click OK. 5 In the list title field. On the Filter tab. and drag it to the sheet. select Sheet Index.Title Sheet.

and so on). The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. doors. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Training File Using Legends | 347 . and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. 11 Save the file. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. For the text. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. and door frames. On construction documents. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. click Modify. On construction documents. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference.9 On the Design Bar. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. door frame schedule. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Finally. windows.

you create a text type with the necessary size. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. click Text. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. type Legend Text.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. click Symbol.Open Level Head . click Duplicate. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 10 For Text Size.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. select Arial. for Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . click . type 3mm. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 For Text Font.rvt. and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 On the Options Bar. type Typical Symbol Legend. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. 16 In the Project Browser. 14 Working from the top down. verify that is selected. and click to place it. expand Sheets (all). and for Leader. click Typical Symbol Legend.Site Plan/Floor Plan.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. and double-click A101 . Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . expand Legends.

23 Save the file. 18 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 19 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. under Sheets. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.Unit 18. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet.17 In the Type Selector. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. double-click A102 . select Viewport : No Titlemark. and click to place it.

select Medium for Detail Level. For View. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 5 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click Legend Component. for Name. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. select 1 : 50. 3 For Scale. type 4th Floor Wall Types. For Host length.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. type 900 mm. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . and press ENTER. select Section.

for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider.9 On the Design Bar. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. for Leader. and on the Options Bar. click Text. for Family. 13 On the Options Bar. click to add text without a leader. 12 In the Type Selector. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Select the second wall. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Modify.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.

right-click Sheets (all). 19 Type the following text. and click New Sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Level 4.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. 23 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and drag it to the new sheet. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. The text note with leader is added to the legend. click OK to accept the default titleblock. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. click to add text with a single-segment leader. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet.

drag it onto the sheet. click Modify to end the command. The open drawings are both visible. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 26 On the Design Bar.25 In the Project Browser. under Legends. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 29 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser.

The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. select Detail Level: Medium. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 35 On the View Control Bar. 33 In the floor plan view. select the Wall Type 2 component. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. 34 Select the patio divider wall. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. click (Match Type).

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. double-click Level 4. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. contractor inquiries. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.36 Optionally. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. click 37 Save the file. These changes can be due to owner requests. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. In this exercise. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. or changes in building material availability. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. under Floor Plans. You can create a sequence of revisions. Using the table. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet.

2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. type a date. For example. When you use this option. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. If Visible is not selected. the revision is locked and issued to the field. In most instances. In general. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. When Issued is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . for Numbering. verify that Per Project is selected. 7 Under Show. 5 For Description. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. If you select Per Sheet. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. yet as concise as possible. if the active revision is number 1.

you make changes to the project floor plan. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 5 Select the divider. including revision number and revision date. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 4. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. move the cursor up. 4 On the Edit toolbar.rvt. under Floor Plans. 3 Select the divider. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.8 Click OK. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Save the file. Revision clouds have read-only properties. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. click (Move). Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and click OK. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. In the Snaps dialog. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. select Snaps Off.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Finish Sketch. click near the partition you moved. 11 On the Design Bar. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . 8 In the drawing area. click Revision Cloud.

for Line Weight. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. select 6. 17 Save the file. you load a revision tag into the project. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 16 Click OK. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 14 In the Object Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing.

click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. scroll down to Revision Clouds. 5 In the Tags dialog. 6 Click Load. under Floor Plans. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. click Training Files. and because the revision is the first in the project. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the drawing area. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table.rvt. click OK. You then issue a revision. Because you chose to number by project. 12 Save the file. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 8 In the Tags dialog. click Tags. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 11 Click to place the tag. double-click Level 4. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. you need to add one. select Leader. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view.

View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. with the description Relocate Door. 7 For Description. type Modify Paving Area. 8 Add another revision row. double-click A107 . A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. under Sheets. 9 Click OK. select Issued. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. and click OK. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You do this by issuing the revision. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. click Add.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. and enter a date for the revision. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. you prevent further changes to the revision.Unnamed. you can no longer modify it. NOTE After you issue a revision. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. You can continue to add revisions. and enter a date.

double-click Level 4. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. Working with Revisions | 363 . under Sheets (all). click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. 12 In the drawing area. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. in the drawing area. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. click to add a revision clouds.Modify Paving Area. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. select Seq. double-click A107 . 11 On the Drafting tab. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 2 . apply Seq.Unnamed. 10 In the Project Browser. select Tag ➤ By Category. 17 Using the same method learned previously.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. select Revision Cloud. 19 To add tags. 3 . under Floor Plans. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. for Revision.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 20 On the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. select the revision cloud.

For each revision. for Sequence. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. select the titleblock. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. select Alphabetic. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. beginning with "D". for Numbering. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 26 In the drawing area. height. clear Issued. and rotation) to the revision schedule. You do this so that the revision can be changed. delete the first 3 characters. you edit the titleblock family. 25 Click OK twice. Click Options.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences.

select Bottom-up. click Edit Family. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. and click Properties.27 On the Options Bar. click Edit. for Appearance. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. Working with Revisions | 365 . 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. for Build Schedule. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. Select Grid lines. 28 In the alert dialog. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Yes. and drag it above the schedule area. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. under Other. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 33 Select the schedule header. Clear Blank row before data. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. and press DELETE. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. Select Outline. click Load into Projects. click Yes. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 34 On the Design Bar. right-click Revision Schedule.

48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. select 90° Counterclockwise. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. for Formatting. for Heading. for Rotation on Sheet. under Other. With a user-defined height. and on the Options Bar. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. select the revision schedule. When the height property is variable. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. select User defined. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Revision Schedule. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. open the titleblock family for editing. and click Properties. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 46 Click OK twice. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 40 Select the revision schedule header. 45 On the Appearance tab. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area.. click Edit. enter Rev. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. for Height.

you learn to import information (such as images. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. click Yes. click Load into Projects.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . text. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project.

Title Sheet. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. for Leader. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and place it on a sheet.Importing Image Files In this exercise.JPG. under Sheets.Title Sheet. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click Text. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click T . 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click to add text without a leader.rvt. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. double-click T . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.

you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.doc text file in another window. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. with the new text box still selected. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. click Modify. 11 Save the file.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 6 Select the text. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 .

click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. select the document writer. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.rvt. double-click A102 . 5 Click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 3 In Microsoft Excel.xls. click Training Files. click Modify. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. under Sheets. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 10 On the Design Bar. This step has been completed for you. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. and click Save.JPG. type Fixture Schedule. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.JPG. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. for Name. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Print.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 12 Save the file. for File name. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. click Desktop. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. This process may vary from system to system.Unit 18. 4 Under Printer.mdi.

called dependent views.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you break up the plan into sections. or footprint. To effectively document this project. The large floor plan. as well as a large lab building. 371 .

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 .Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. click Training Files. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. under Level 2. 2 In the Project Browser. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . right-click Level 2. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and the model crop is the interior crop region. 6 In the drawing area. double-click Level 2. select the crop region. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. enter Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit. The dependent view opens. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area.Aviary. for Name. 4 In the Rename View dialog.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 .8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

14 Click in the drawing area. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and click Rename. for Name. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . enter Level 2 . and click OK. 13 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom To Fit. 12 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Labs. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 11 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. 15 Select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).10 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit.

click (Hide Crop Region). 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Matchline. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Modify.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. double-click Level 2.

24 On the Design Bar. Click above the left corner of the lab building. click Finish Sketch. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. and click. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm.

26 In the Object Styles dialog. right-click A101 . expand Sheets. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Aviary. select 9. and click OK. 28 For Line Pattern. and click Rename. and click OK. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. select Double Dash. under Floor Plans. click the Annotation Objects tab. and drag it onto the sheet. for Line Weight. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. enter Level 2 Aviary. click Level 2 . 31 In the Project Browser. 27 Under Matchline. for Name.Unnamed. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 33 In the Project Browser. click OK to accept the default titleblock.

and place the Level 2 .Labs dependent view on the sheet. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Target view.35 On the Design Bar. click View Reference. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser.Aviary is selected. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.

click Modify. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 45 On the Zoom flyout. for Target view. click Zoom To Fit. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 44 On the Design Bar.Labs.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

after modifying the annotation crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. under Floor Plans. click the far right control. 48 Select the crop region. 49 If. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. click (Show Crop Region). Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.46 In the Project Browser. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 47 On the View Control Bar.Aviary. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. double-click Level 2 .

and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 55 On the Zoom flyout. 54 In the Project Browser. 51 On the View Control Bar.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. and click OK. 52 In the Project Browser. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. and click Apply Dependent Views. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . select all views in the list. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. but are not placed on sheets. right-click Level 2. expand Level 1. under Floor Plans. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog.

The matchline is already placed in the view. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click South Elevation. click Zoom To Fit. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.57 On the Zoom flyout. click Training Files.

4 In the Rename View dialog.The dependent view opens. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 8 In the Project Browser. select the Crop Region. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. enter South Elevation . 9 In the Project Browser. enter South Elevation .Left. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Rename. and click OK. cropping the view to the lab building. 3 In the Project Browser.Right. right-click South Elevation. click (Hide Crop Region). expand South Elevation. and click OK. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 7 On the View Control Bar. and drag it toward the center of the view. 5 In the drawing area. 11 Select the crop region. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Rename. for Name. 10 In the Rename View dialog. cropping the view to the aviary. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. for Name.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View | 403 .

on the View tab of the Design Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. The perspective view displays. click Camera. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

If the camera is not shown in the view. Depending on camera placement. double-click Site. as necessary. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. With the camera shown. in the Project Browser. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . and select the crop boundary. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. and click Show Camera. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. and adjust the field of vision. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1.3 Zoom out. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. as shown.

Day. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition.Day to open the view. right-click 3D View 1. 10 Save the file. double-click Exterior . 7 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. under 3D Views.6 In the Project Browser. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. enter Exterior . and click OK.

You then duplicate the view.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. under 3D Views. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. and render a daytime view of the exterior. double-click Exterior .rvt.Day. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. modify render settings. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.

408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Rename dialog. and click Render. select Medium. for Sun. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. 8 Under Quality. under Background. 6 Click OK twice. 3pm. You adjust cloud settings as required. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. In this case. select Spring Equinox. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). enter Spring Equinox . and click Rename.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Rendering dialog. select Edit/New. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. select Sky: Cloudy. under Lighting.Santa Monica. for New. 3 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. NOTE If a background image is required. You create a location and time for the rendering.

select Portable Network Graphics (*. click Export. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. click Desktop. For Files of type. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . 13 Close the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. 10 In the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. After the image is rendered. click Show the model. Click Save.9 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering.png).

click OK. and click OK. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and select the last light. click Dialog). on the View Control Bar. select Exterior: Artificial only. dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Exterior . under Ungrouped Lights. 25 Using the same method. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. for Scheme. 27 In the Rendering dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. 16 With the Exterior . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. 24 In the New Light Group dialog.Flat Round : 60W .Night. enter Pool Lights. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . under 3D Views.Night view open. click New. under Lighting.Flat Round : 60W . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. add 30 :Sconce Light . To select a sequential list.120V.Day view to Exterior . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . click New.Day. and click OK. and click Move to Group. press and hold SHIFT. click Render.Exterior . 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . under Group Options.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . for Name. under Group Options. you duplicate the view and change the settings.Flat Round : 60W . and click OK. select the first light.Night. and click Artificial Lights. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.120V to the Pool Lights group. verify that Pool Lights is selected. for Name.Flat Round : 60W .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. 22 Using the same method. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. enter Pool House Lights.

and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. In this example. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. click Show the model. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. for Exposure Value. 30 In the Rendering dialog. enter 4. click Adjust Exposure. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. and click OK. 32 Save the file. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. After the image is rendered. under Image. Rendering an Interior View | 411 .

render the views. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. define the perspective view and rendering settings. Adding RPC People In this exercise. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. and finally.

Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. ■ (Rotate). Exact placement is not important. 4 In the Type Selector. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. and place the component inside the pool house.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. select RPC Female : YinYin. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. click Component. double-click Level 1. 5 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the figure. the person’s line of sight. click Modify. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Adding RPC People | 413 . 2 Zoom in to the pool house.

for Render Appearance Properties. click Edit/New. 14 Save the file. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. you can enable this option. click (Element Properties). click Modify. click Edit. 12 Click OK 3 times. under Identity Data.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. By default. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Cast Reflections. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Parameters. In order to see the figure’s reflection.

Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.rvt. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. click Camera.

right-click 3D View 1. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK.The perspective view displays. under 3D Views. and click Properties. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. 4 In the Project Browser. under Extents. select Section Box.

select the section box. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Elevations (Building Elevations). Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . 9 In the Project Browser. double-click South.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. under Floor Plans. in addition to the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 In the 3D view. double-click Level 1. In order to accurately adjust the section box.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category.12 In the floor plan view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select the section box. right-click. size the box as shown. size the box as shown. 14 In the 3D view. 13 In the South Elevation view.

16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. and render the interior view. 17 Save the file. and curtain walls. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. doors that contain windows or glass. To create a daytime view. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Maximize the 3D view.

and click OK. select Interior: Artificial only. for Scheme. select Draft. you turn them off for this scene.Night. click Render. for Setting. 7 Under Quality. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under 3D Views. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and click OK. enter Interior . 5 Click Artificial Lights. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level.rvt. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. and click Rename. You can specify a lower quality. 4 In the Rendering dialog. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 3 On the View Control Bar. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 In the Rename View dialog. After these settings are established. under Lighting. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 8 In the Rendering dialog. right-click 3D View 1. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. clear Pool Lights. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser.

The preset schemes are read-only. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. select Edit. the daylight portals can be turned on. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. select Region. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Rendering dialog.Santa Monica. for Sun. You create a view for the interior during the day.9 Close the Rendering dialog. 17 In the Rendering dialog. and click Render. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views.Night. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. select Spring Equinox . Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . select Curtain Walls. By default they are turned off. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. For more information on daylight portals. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. select Interior: Sun only. but the space will receive standard daylighting. click Copy To Custom. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . In this case. right-click Interior . for Daylight Portal Options.Day. For sunlit interiors. for Scheme. and click OK. 3pm. you must create a custom setting. click 14 For Setting. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. in order to turn on daylight portals. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. (Show Rendering Dialog).

Click OK. select the column on the right. click Properties). 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. and on the Options Bar. click Adjust Exposure. click Show the model. For Saturation. enter 10.18 In the Rendering dialog. under Image. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. In the next steps. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. enter 1. 20 In the Rendering dialog. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and close the Rendering dialog.

28 In the Rendering dialog. under Output Settings.22 In the Element Properties dialog. click the dimensions for Size. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). and click Render. for Setting. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and click OK. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Based on wood grain. You change the varnish setting. As size and DPI are increased. select Printer. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select the crop boundary. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . For Bump. For Rotate. select Unfinished. 26 Click Update Preview. clear Region. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. For Width. enter 90. and on the Options Bar. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Click OK. for Resolution. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 24 In the Materials dialog. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish.6. click OK. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. For Amount. enter 5''. the render time increases significantly. 29 In the Rendering dialog. 30 In the drawing area. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. add a bump map to create texture. select High. 23 With the column still selected. select Wood.

The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. but you can also define it in a 3D. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. The walkthrough path is a spline. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. In a plan view. or section view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. independent of the Revit Architecture software. Usually. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. elevation. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames.The rendered image displays. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial.

If you prefer to use metric values.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. on the Options Bar. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. verify that Perspective is selected. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. click Walkthrough. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and double-click 1st Floor. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . and change unit formats as desired. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. proceeds through the dining room. right-click in the Design Bar. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and ends in the far corner of the living room. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and click the tab in the context menu.

on the Options Bar. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. and double-click Walkthrough 1. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. click Finish.

click Edit Walkthrough. If it is not. 16 On the Options Bar. and for Height. enter 16''. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . enter 9''. for Width. on the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. for Frame. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. click the dimensions for Size. select the crop boundary. enter 1. 12 On the View menu. verify that Field of view is selected. 17 Click . and click OK. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and select the crop boundary. 14 Click . 11 Under Change.

428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.The walkthrough plays.rvt. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. click (Element Properties). Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. proceed to the next exercise. under Extents. and click OK. press ESC. clear Far Clip Active. double-click 1st Floor. under Floor Plans. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. c_Townhouse. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

6 On the Options Bar. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). for Controls. and drag it to the location shown. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 7 Click the third key frame position. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . select Path. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration.

under Walkthroughs. select <Shading>. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. shading. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. When you export the walkthrough. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . on the Options Bar. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. enter 15. and save the exercise file with a unique name. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. specifying the number of frames. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds.rvt. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. for Frames/sec. shading with edges. for Compressor. reducing the size of the image. The walkthrough is recorded. click Edit Walkthrough. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 If you want to save this exercise. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. and click OK. c_Townhouse. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. hidden line. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 9 To play the walkthrough. or rendering. under Output Length. double-click Walkthrough 1. 3 Under Format. If you are unsure of what option to use. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. for Model Graphics Style.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Save.

More specifically. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. In this tutorial. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. 431 . you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs.

click shown. A 3D view is created. click Training Files. as shown. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point.rvt. 4 On the View toolbar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and double-click 01 Entry. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. expand Floor Plans.Courtyard View In this exercise. (SteeringWheels). and open Common\c_Solar_Study. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 1 In the Project Browser. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. click Camera. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating a Solar Study .

and click Rename. click Section. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. if necessary. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. click Modify. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. click Save As. 9 On the File menu. you create a section cutaway view.5 On the Design Bar. right-click 3D View 1. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. expand 3D Views. double-click 01 Entry. 7 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study . 8 In the Rename View dialog.Courtyard View. under Floor Plans.

expand Sections. click 10 On the View toolbar. click Modify. right-click Section 1. as shown. double-click the section head. 6 To view the section. 11 On the SteeringWheel. and click Rename. (SteeringWheels). click Modify. 8 In the Rename View dialog. click . 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar.

Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. then Fine. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. under 3D Views. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . click Save. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. In some cases. as shown. and click OK. then select Medium. you create a plan cutaway view. 5 In the Project Browser. 18 On the File menu. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. and click OK. 17 To hide the section box. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. do not display many elements in 3D. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar.14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Typical plan views. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. click . double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 15 In the Rename View dialog. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. including the house. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Rename View dialog. right-click {3D}. and click Rename. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. click Callout. 16 On the View Control Bar.

12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click Modify. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 11 On the Design Bar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 15 Select the Roof. as shown. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. click (SteeringWheels). and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side.8 On the View toolbar. 9 On the SteeringWheel. as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. so you can see into the building from the top.

under 3D Views. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. and click OK. under 3D Views. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 .17 On the View Control Bar.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. right-click {3D}. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 19 In the Rename View dialog. click Save. 21 On the File menu. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

4 For Sun Position. USA is selected. 10 Under Place. USA. Click the Single-Day tab.Creating Solar Studies . and time range. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. single-day. For this study. and time. leave the slider at 50. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. MA. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. select Los Angeles. CA.Boston. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. and click Duplicate. click click OK. expand Views (all). or multi-day solar study. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. enter Summer Solstice. expand 3D Views. you specify the location. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 2 On the View Control Bar. For the Multi-Day solar study. you specify the location. For the Single-Day solar study. date. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. for City. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. You can create a still. click . Los Angeles. . date range. 9 In the Name dialog. click . You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 3 Select Cast Shadows. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

7 On the Options Bar. Los Angeles. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. under Frame. select June 22. 14 In this case. confirm that Summer Solstice. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Winter Solstice. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. Los Angeles. click Save. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 2 On the View Control Bar. click . Under Frame. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. on the Single-Day tab. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . select December 22. You can select the level to be used for shadow display.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for Sun Position.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. Los Angeles is selected. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Clear Ground Plane at Level. 19 On the File menu. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. 6 On the View Control Bar. enter Winter Solstice. and click Duplicate. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. and click OK. 2008. 2008. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. ■ For Time Interval. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 8 On the Options Bar. enter 20 and press ENTER. click OK. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. for Date. For Time Range. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. enter 10 and press ENTER. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Courtyard View is currently displayed.

PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. and click OK. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Los Angeles. under Floor Plans. click To display the next sequential frame. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . 13 On the View Control Bar. approximately as shown. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. for Sun Position. click To play the animation from start to finish. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. click . click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. select Summer Solstice.■ To display the next key frame. click . click OK. The solar study animation plays. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click Text. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. on the Single-Day tab. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. . 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . ■ To display the previous sequential frame.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. click . Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry. . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar.

NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. approximately as shown.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. 5 In the Project Browser. click . Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. On the Options Bar. as shown. 8 For Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar. Click and enter Dining. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. expand 3D Views. as shown. click . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. click Lines.

Los Angeles. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. 12 In the drawing area. 14 Click outside of the section box. ■ For Frames per second. select the section box. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. On the Annotation Categories tab. clear Section Boxes.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 15 To hide the section box. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. and click OK. click OK. under Output Length. On the Annotation Categories tab. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. if necessary. on the Single-Day tab. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Frame Range. and enter 5 to 50. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Section Boxes. select Summer Solstice. verify that the value is set to 15. as shown. 11 To display the section box. and click OK. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.

click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. select AVI Files. of the animation separately. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . 19 In the Video Compression dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. Under Format.■ ■ Under Format. under Output Length. 2 On the View Control Bar. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. on the Single-Day tab. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. Los Angeles. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. For File Name. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. for Compressor. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. or frame.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Winter Solstice. and enter 5 to 10. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. click . you open each image. To maintain the proportions of the frame. 3 For Sun Position. click OK. verify that Hidden Line is selected. select Frame Range. for Model Graphics Style. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. for Model Graphics Style. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. verify that Hidden Line is selected. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Los Angeles. enter 450 in the first field (width). To view the animation. For Frames per second. For Files of Type. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. For Dimensions. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Click OK. and click OK. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.

In this example. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. click Save. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. as shown: 9 On the File menu. or GIF. For Files of Type. TIFF. depending on the Frame Range. For File name. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select PNG. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog.■ For Dimensions. BMP. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise.Los Angeles. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click the Desktop icon. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under 3D Views. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Click OK. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. such as JPEG. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. or any single-frame format. 8 Click Save. enter 450 in the first field (width).

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.

9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . and on the View Control Bar.Los Angeles . 12 In the Name dialog. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 5 Select the roof. For Time Interval.Boston.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. select One week. USA. and click OK. click OK. for Sun Position. and click OK. click the Multi-Day tab. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . MA. clear Section Boxes. For Time. specify 2:00 pm.Week Interval. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. for File name enter 2pm . Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. 8 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

Re-orienting the Project | 447 . and annotations in non-drafting views. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. such as East . you mirror all model elements. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. Click the Desktop icon. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. In the Length/Format dialog. click OK.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). for Compressor. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. 17 On the View Control Bar. and click Save. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. and click OK.South. When you mirror a project. for File Name. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. model views.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North.West or North .

Then. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. under 3D Views. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. In this exercise. 6 On the Standard toolbar. The project is mirrored along the East . 2 In the drawing area. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. right-click. select the roof. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process.West axis. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. For additional information. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. click OK. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select East .West. 5 In the warning dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view.

4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. click Apply. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click . 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 5 For Sun Position. 12 Under Date and Time. Orienting to True North | 449 . Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. specify 11:00 AM for time. on the Still tab. select Cast Shadows. select Summer Solstice. click . click the Still tab.3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 8 For Sun Position. click . For example. and click OK. 11 For Sun Position. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and select Winter Solstice. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Under Date and Time. change the time back to 12:00 PM. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK.

click the Still tab. and click OK. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. 19 In the Project Browser. and select Winter Solstice. click OK. double-click 01 Entry. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. This process establishes the view setting to True North. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. under Floor Plans. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 18 In the Project Browser. right click 01 Entry.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 15 For Sun Position. When a project is started. for Orientation. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. select True North. and click Properties. click OK. click . the view settings must be set for True North. and click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. as shown. click toward the top of the screen.■ To establish the True North direction. The floor plan rotates in the view. Orienting to True North | 451 . ■ To establish the new direction of True North.

click the Still tab. right-click. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. right-click 01 Entry. select True North. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. for Orientation. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select Project North. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 32 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 01 Entry. and click OK. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.23 In the Project Browser. enter True North Orientation. and click Properties. under 3D Views. and click OK. and click Apply. 28 In the Project Browser. select Summer Solstice. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. select True North Orientation. click . 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. for Orientation. 33 For Sun Position. 27 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. right-click. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. 25 In the Project Browser.

Click Save. verify that AVI Files is selected. click OK. Click OK. Orienting to True North | 453 . Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Desktop icon. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. For File Name. enter 600 in the first field. under Format. for Compressor. Los Angeles. In the Length/Format dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. For Files of Type. and click OK. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. and click OK. for Dimensions. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Summer Solstice. click the Single-Day tab.

double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. select 12/22. click Render. and click OK. select Winter Solstice. select Medium. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. 2 In the Project Browser. for Date and Time. Under Lighting. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. Rendered views do not have this limitation. For Sun. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. under Settings. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. In the Name dialog. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. (Show Rendering Dialog). double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. select Interior: Sun only. Since a rendered image is temporary. for Setting. and click Duplicate. select Edit/New. and exporting it as a JPEG image. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. and 2:00 PM. for Scheme. In this exercise. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. under Quality. under 3D Views. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under 3D Views. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. 3 On the View Control Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. capturing it.

In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . and click Save. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Desktop. and click OK. enter living area_winter solstice.6 In the Rendering dialog. click Export. click Save to Project. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. verify that JPEG Files is selected. NOTE Rendered views are temporary.

456 .

elevations. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. 457 . Using the pre-built building model. In this series of exercises. you explore the stylistic approach. however. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. and section boxes. advanced model graphics. linework. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. They include rendering. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. For the realistic approach. In this tutorial. you can choose between realism and stylistics. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. Other tools in the software. Co-house. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. or the client. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. a consultant. sections. When organizing presentation graphics. an outside reviewer. and details. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. length. type.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Whether the audience is the general contractor.

and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a presentation floor plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a copy of the plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson.

Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and click OK. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Cnst. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. exit the menu. and click Rename. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click in the drawing area. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Cnst. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 .Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. right-click 2nd Flr.

Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and Up Arrow. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. this represents the view getting smaller. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. click the Annotation Categories tab. 11 In the Save As directory. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Scale control and select 1:100.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. elevations. 8 Click OK. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.rvt. 7 Under Visibility. dimensions. and click Save. UP Text. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Down Arrow. and clear DOWN Text. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and other annotations in this view. expand the Stairs category. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. No annotations display in the view. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. navigate to the folder of your choice. sections.

specify 35. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. you can create. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. ■ For Contrast. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world.rvt. select Sun and Shadow Settings. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. At that place. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 12 Click OK. you can select any city. MA. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . 9 For City. however. select By Date. select Cast Shadows. click the Place tab. double-click it in the Project Browser. select Boston. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Within a project. click (Shadows Off). 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. The higher the number. for Date and Time. 7 For Place. and select 1st Flr. 1:00 PM. click . The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. NOTE For this step. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. 3 On the View Control Bar. on the Still tab.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . the darker the shadows. For Sun Position. click OK. 6 Under Settings. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. modify. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. If you select a different city. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Cnst. Time and Place. specify 10/27. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

. click OK. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click (Shadows On). 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click OK. clear Ground Plane at Level. under Settings. for Sun Position. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.

select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. click Sheet.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 4 In the Views dialog. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Modify. and notice the view title. 6 On the Design Bar. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. The viewport displays at the cursor. select Arch Portrait. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click Add View to Sheet. and click to place it. and click View. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . click Add View. and click OK. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar.

Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish this. for Show Title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. under Graphics. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select No. The viewport no longer displays a view title. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click Duplicate. and click OK. and click Activate View. click .Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. enter Presentation. For this analytique.

19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 22 On the Design Bar. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 20 On the Options Bar. fill properties. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 18 On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. click . and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. and select Chain. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . 17 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. When you finish drawing the chain. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click Filled Region. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click . draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. If necessary. and the boundary of the region. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. select Invisible lines. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

scroll down. 30 On the Design Bar. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. for Fill Pattern. and click OK. and click View Properties. click Finish Sketch. and click Deactivate View. enter Presentation. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.24 In the Type Properties dialog. select Solid fill. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. click Duplicate. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. enter Solid Black. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. under Graphics. 25 In the Name dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. click . under Identity Data. for Sheet Name. and click OK. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Name. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466.

Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations.rvt. right-click South. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

click OK. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. right-click Copy of South. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click . and click OK. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. By changing the angle of the sun. under Pattern Overrides. and click OK. enter Presentation South Elevation. exit the menu.2 In the Project Browser. 18 For Time. Time and Place. scroll up. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 14 For Sun Position. and clear Elevation Swing. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and click OK. click Duplicate. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. clear Visible. click in the Walls row. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. specify 35. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. click Override. expand the Doors category. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. on the Model Categories tab. 16 In the Name dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. specify 2:30 PM. click in the drawing area. click (Shadows Off). 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. under Settings. under Elevations. 9 Click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 13 For Contrast. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click Rename. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. under Visibility. under Visibility. select By Date. 12 Under Shadow.

Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).rvt.Presentation. 3 In the Views dialog. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. click Add View. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click A105 .

select Viewport : Presentation. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays.The viewport displays a view title.

9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . 7 On the Design Bar. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson.

for Scale. 4 Add the section shown below. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). select 1: 100.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. click Section. double-click 1st Flr. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 3 On the Options Bar. Cnst. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. To fit correctly in the analytique. click Callout. this view needs to be rotated 180°. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. as shown. and double-click Section 2.Section 2 is added to the building model. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for Scale. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. expand Sections (Callout 1). To accomplish this. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 100.

scroll up. click in the Walls row. under Pattern Overrides. click Modify. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. right-click Callout of Section 2. and click OK. click the Model Categories tab. expand the Doors category. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1). click Override. 12 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Sections (Callout 1). 15 Under Visibility. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 17 Under Visibility. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 11 In the Rename View dialog. enter Presentation Section 2.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. clear Visible. and clear Elevation Swing. double-click Presentation Section 2.

The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. click The crop regions no longer display. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. (Hide Crop Region). Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 20 Click OK. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. When you select the crop region. 22 On the View Control Bar. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Duplicate. For Contrast. Click Apply. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. 2 On the View Control Bar. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. under Sections (Callout 1). Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. in the Project Browser. click . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view.rvt. In the steps that follow. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. In addition. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. ■ For Sun Position. specify 35. and click OK. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). specify the following: Under Shadow. select Cast Shadows. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Presentation Section 2. The shadows do not offer much contrast. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar.

10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Select Relative to View. NOTE The line style. and click OK. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows On). specify 70°. For Altitude. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Silhouette style. select Directly. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. select Silhouette Edges. click OK. For Azimuth. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click OK. specify 135°. was added to this training file for training purposes. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Silhouette Edges. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. under Sheets (all). and click to place the selected view. 3 In the Views dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. double-click A105 . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Add View to Sheet.rvt.Presentation. click Add View.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. select Section: Presentation Section 2.

under Sections (Callout 1). you click to specify the start radius. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view.5 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Edit toolbar. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. click Modify. The view title no longer displays. click (Rotate). enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. and press Enter. Using a clock as a reference. The section needs to be rotated 180°. double-click Section 2. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. 6 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : Presentation. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . To rotate an object.

The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.Presentation. under Sheets (all). Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 .The callout rotates 180°. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.

you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . click Modify. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. After applying the view template to a new section view. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

under Sections (Type 1).rvt. right-click Section 1. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the New View Template dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click Copy of Section 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. double-click Presentation Section 2. enter Presentation Section 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Presentation. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). 4 In the View Templates dialog. you can simply apply the presentation view template. 7 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser.

you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and elevation swings no longer display. select Viewport : Presentation. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click OK. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. under Graphics. and click Deactivate View.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Activate View. 14 In the Type Selector.Presentation. under Sheets (all). under Names. select Presentation. click Add View. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 18 Right-click the viewport. The furniture. and click Add View to Sheet. for Rotation on Sheet. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 15 Right-click the viewport. double-click A105 . select 90° Counterclockwise. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Views dialog. annotations. lighting fixtures. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click OK.

In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as a tracery window or a column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. traditional analytiques contain a detail. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click Callout of Section 1. click Callout. select the callout. 4 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. After you add the callout. double-click Section 1. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Rename. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. as shown. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). as shown. 7 Select the crop region. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. clear Annotation Crop. and click OK.5 In the Rename View dialog. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. enter Presentation Callout. clear Crop Region Visible. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. 8 Right-click. under Extents. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. and click View Properties.

Click OK. click Modify.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. under Sheets (all). click Add View.Presentation. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. specify 22. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. For Scale Value 1. 15 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. double-click A105 . 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Add View to Sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. select Section: Presentation Callout. select Custom. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 .

Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. click Region Properties. click Filled Region. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. 23 On the Design Bar. activate the viewport. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. double-click Presentation Callout. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Deactivate View. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. and make adjustments as necessary.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. When finished. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. and move it to the position shown below. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. In the steps that follow. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog.

The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog.25 In the Type Properties dialog.Presentation. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. click Filled Region. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. click . Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. When you are finished. on the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click Activate View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . double-click A105 . and click OK 3 times. select Solid fill. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. for Fill Pattern. under Sheets (all).

490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .31 On the Options Bar. click . 33 On the View Control Bar. 34 Select the crop region. and sketch the rectangle shown below. click (Show Crop Region). The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 32 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays.

36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . and click Deactivate View.35 On the View Control Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. click (Hide Crop Region).

and click Advanced Model Graphics. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. click (Shadows Off). and click 1 : 200.rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. double-click Isometric. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control. and apply shadows to the views. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser.

Select Ground Plane at Level. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 135°. select Cast Shadows. and click Rename. 13 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. in the list. For Altitude. enter Isometric 1. Click OK. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. right-click Isometric 1. select Section Box. and click OK. enter Isometric 2. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. Select 1st Flr. 8 In the Name dialog. select Directly. under 3D Views. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 35. For Contrast. under Extents. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. A section box displays around the building model. under 3D Views. Cnst. for Silhouette style. right-click Isometric. and click OK. specify 45°. click Duplicate. 14 In the Project Browser. For Sun Position. For Azimuth. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. select Silhouette Edges. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. Select Relative to View.

19 Select the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. When you are finished. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. as shown. Grips display on each face of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. You can use this to rotate the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

24 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 27 Select the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 31 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. select Viewport : Presentation. The section box no longer displays. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. double-click A105 . enter Isometric 3. make a copy of the view. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. 25 To hide the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. Next. In the Type Selector. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . On the Annotation Categories tab. 23 In the Rename View dialog. When you are finished.Presentation. clear Section Boxes. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. 22 In the Project Browser. you can adjust the plane location. and click OK. and click Rename. 29 To hide the section box. double-click Isometric 3. click Modify on the Design Bar. right-click Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. If desired. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click Isometric 2.

under 3D Views.32 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. In the Type Selector. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. under 3D Views. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. 33 In the Project Browser. The filled region partially covers the view. select Viewport : Presentation.

41 On the Design Bar. This will make it easier to draw lines. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 39 For Background. On the Options Bar.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 36 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Lines. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . click Region Properties. 35 Select the poche filled region. select Concrete. and click Activate View. select Transparent. click Edit. 42 Using the drawing tools. 40 Click OK twice. for Fill Patterns.

49 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Region Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 47 On the Design Bar. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. click Finish Sketch. for Fill Pattern. click Edit/New.43 On the Design Bar. select Solid fill. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 50 Proceed with the next exercise.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. then you specify the eye direction and range. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. a cutaway perspective view. under Floor Plans. Cnst. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create the final view for the analytique. you add it to the presentation sheet. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . double-click 1st Flr.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. click Camera. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. The view opens immediately.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 35. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. For Sun Position. specify the following: Under Shadow. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. For Contrast. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. for Silhouette style. 6 On the View Control Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). select Silhouette Edges. and click OK. for Name. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. click .4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it.

and click OK. select Section Box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. 12 Select the section box. Grips display on each plane of the section box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . A section box now cuts through the building model. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. under Extents.

and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. click Size. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. enter 165 mm. select Viewport : Presentation. and click OK. 19 To hide the section box. under Change. 18 On the View Control Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. In the Type Selector. you must specify the actual size of the image.Presentation. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. select Scale (locked proportions). click (Hide Crop Region). Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 21 In the Project Browser. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click A105 . On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 17 Under Model Crop Size.14 Select the crop region. under Sheets (all). for Width. under 3D Views.

click Duplicate.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. select a font.Presentation sheet is not the active view. double-click it in the Project Browser. specify a text size of 40 mm. 10 In the Name dialog. and click OK. select Text : Title. and click OK. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click Duplicate. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Name dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . click Edit/New. click Text. select the same font as the title. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Title. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. click . 7 In the Type Properties dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify a text size of 6 mm. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Description. click OK. under Text. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet.

15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

507 . you create a small building from the front mass form. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. Once the model has been imported. curtain walls.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. such as walls. and roofs. you can easily add detail with Revit components. After you import the SketchUp model. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. that compose the building. In this tutorial.

This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. buildings. click OK. and not in the library. for File name. 10 In the Name dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. select All. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. select Preserve. and click Save. Double-click the Common folder. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. 6 In the Save As dialog. visible elements. you create a Revit Architecture project. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select SketchUp Files. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.skp. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Create Mass. enter Import SketchUp. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. click OK. under Template file. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. For Colors. and click OK. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. right-click in the Design Bar. click the Massing tab. For Import units.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. enter SketchUp Model. Click the Sketchup file. For Layers. select Auto-Detect.rte. or select from a list. For Files of type. click Training Files. 9 In the informational dialog. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

curtain walls. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. click Finish Mass. and roofs. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . 17 In the warning dialog. In a new project. select Level 1. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. ■ ■ For Positioning. 14 On the View toolbar. depending on the complexity of the project. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. click . 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. click the Close button. Click Open. select Manual . Level 1 is the only choice. For Place at level. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. such as walls. 16 On the Design Bar.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.Center.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. that compose the building. After you create the building from the mass faces. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. curtain walls. click Roof by Face. 4 On the Options Bar.400mm displays. for Level. and on the View Control Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. select the face so that it highlights in red. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. and roofs. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . verify Basic Roof: Generic . Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. verify Level 2 is selected. such as walls.18 Proceed to the next exercise.

10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. on the Options Bar.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click Create Roof. on the View toolbar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . To see the new roof. 6 On the Options Bar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. A roof is created from the mass face. 9 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. click to display masses.

512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Create Roof. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof by Face.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.

and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . for Loc Line. 21 On the Design Bar.200mm displays. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. click Modify to end the command. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. click Wall by Face.15 On the Design Bar. click roofs that you created. 23 On the Options Bar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. select Core Face: Exterior. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 22 In the Type Selector. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. verify Basic Wall: Generic .

24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. click Curtain System by Face. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. click to view only the walls and roofs. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 25 On the View toolbar. 28 In the Type Selector. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 26 Click to redisplay the masses.

33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. 32 On the View toolbar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below.30 On the Options Bar. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create System. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 31 Using the same technique.

click Create Roof. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Wall by Face. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. and on the Options Bar. click Curtain System. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Roof by Face. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. select the other wall. and select it. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.35 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the mass face shown below. click Create System.

Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Below the right corner of the view. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select the mass face shown below. click to view the building that you have created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . under Floor Plans. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. specify a point to place the camera. 42 On the View toolbar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. click Camera. click Wall by Face.

as shown. Click the frame to display its grips. specify a point for the camera target. The perspective view created by the camera displays. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. to view only the walls. roofs. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. 48 On the View toolbar. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. click your building in the view.

select Center. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. for Justification. and select the left curtain system in the view. Click OK. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification. 50 On the Options Bar.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. click . Under Grid 2 Pattern. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . click Modify. select Center.

Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . under 3D Views. 59 On the View toolbar. and move the roof edges as shown below. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under 3D Views. click Door. 56 In the Project Browser. and click Cancel to end the command. double-click 3D View 1.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 55 Right-click. 63 In the Type Selector. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. double-click {3D}.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

Flat Curtain System In this lesson. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. grid lines.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. This affects the entire curtain system. and they are not windows. Unlike windows. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. or you can use a specific curtain system command. 525 . Like windows. To switch panel types. To change grids. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. For example. you need to change the length of the wall. and you can change these elements individually. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you select the grid. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. Like walls. you create a curtain system using the wall command. panel. to resize the system. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. and mullions. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you need to select a panel.

and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. and double-click Ground Floor.rvt. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. click Training Files. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.

and double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 527 .7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.

enter 1200. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. using curtain grids. For Top Offset. top constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. top and base attachments. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. Click OK.11 Select the curtain system. and click (Properties). 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and room bounding. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint.

24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. click Curtain Grid. 20 In the drawing area. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. right-click Elevation 1 . and resize the crop boundary as shown. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click OK.a. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. click Modify. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and click Rename. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Elevation. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary.

27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. one larger than the other. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. FIFTH FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 33 On the Design Bar. while pressing CTRL. select SECOND FLOOR. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. click Curtain Grid.26 While pressing CTRL. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. Click to place another grid line. THIRD FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. SIXTH FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

37 Click in any white space to exit the editor.Next. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. you add a doorway to the curtain system. The segment line style changes to dashed. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Instead of using the Door command. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. click Add or Remove Segments. and on the Options Bar. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The two segments are removed. and then select the segment above it. Creating an Entrance | 531 .

select One Segment. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. click Curtain Grid. and lock them. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 40 On the Options Bar.38 Using the same method. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 42 Place dimensions as shown.

The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. click in any white space to exit the editor. 43 Delete the dimensions. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. Creating an Entrance | 533 . 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. Use the following image as a guide. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels.

under Elevations. click view. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 55 In the Project Browser. Now. 52 On the Type Selector. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. on the new curtain system you added. . under Floor Plans. 56 In the Project Browser. double-click Entrance Elevation. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. This changes the graphics style of the Next.rfa. They are part of the curtain panel category. not as curtain panels. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and click Wireframe. 54 On the Design Bar. The panel changes to a double door. These panels schedule as doors. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. click Modify. 57 On the View Control Bar. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door.Next. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. click Training Files.

click System Panel : Solid. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 65 On the View Control Bar. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. click .60 On the Type Selector. and the solid panels display in white. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 63 Click OK twice. 61 With the panel still selected. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating an Entrance | 535 . The glazed panels display in blue.

1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. click Mullion. select Grid Line Segment. 2 On the Options Bar. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Save As. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. select Entire Grid Line.rvt.68 On the File menu. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors.

select All Empty Segments. there are a few that you do not want. because their width reduces the size of the doors. however. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 10 Delete the mullions below them. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. You are going to change some mullion joins. clickModify. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. so you remove them next. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 .6 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Two mullion join controls display. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Save the file. Finally. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 16 In the Project Browser. 14 Click the top mullion control. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. click Modify. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. you can also right-click. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . double-click Southeast Isometric.

1 In the Project Browser.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. double-click GROUND FLOOR. Finally. click Wall. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. enter 1200. For Top Offset. Curved Curtain System | 539 . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. (Arc passing through three points). Click OK. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 4 In the Type Selector. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. under Floor Plans. for Top Constraint. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you add a curtain system using the wall command.

14 In the Project Browser. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. under Elevations. double-click East. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. and then sixteenths. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Divide the halves into quarters. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You are going to use one of these snaps points. eighths. you place grids on the system. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. Next. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . select Basic Wall: Generic . click Modify. 18 In the Type Selector. to filter out all 19 Save the file. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. 16 On the Design Bar. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.300mm. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. you change some panels in the system. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. select the bottom layer of panels. Next.

and click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Glass. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar. click Model Lines. double-click Exterior. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 6 On the Options Bar. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 12 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. enter 100. 9 Select the extrusion. under Elevations. 3 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. and click OK. clear Chain. 4 On the Design Bar.rft. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. . for Depth. click Training Files. click . click Lines. 8 On the Design Bar.

rfa family. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Modify. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. and click Change Walls Orientation. click 25 On the View toolbar. and return to the project file. 23 Right-click. 19 In the Project Browser. and save the family as Curtain Panel . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close.Pattern. under Floor Plans.Pattern. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 24 On the View toolbar.rfa. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . double-click FOURTH FLOOR.Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. All fourth floor panels are selected. right-click. 21 In the Type Selector. click (Default 3D View).14 On the Design Bar. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. select Curtain Panel . (SteeringWheels). 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

select System Panel . you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. All fifth floor panels are selected. under Floor Plans. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. 29 In the Type Selector. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building.Solid. 30 Save the file. 27 In the Project Browser. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. All the panels change to the solid panel. right-click.

5 In the left pane of the New dialog. double-click East. and click OK. click ■ ■ For Sides. for Profile Usage. 1 In the Project Browser. For vertical mullions. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Select Radius. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location.rft. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and enter 50 mm for the radius. click Lines. under Elevations. click Mullion. . enter 8. click Training Files. 8 On the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. and select it. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Mullion. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. Click again to specify the ending point. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog.

20 Select the detail component. click (SteeringWheels). 31 Click . 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Mullion. 13 On the Options Bar.rfa. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. clear Fine.rfa. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. click Detail Component. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 17 On the Design Bar. 28 On the View toolbar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click Training Files. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. and click Visibility. and click OK. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. it can be added as a mullion type. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. double-click Southeast Isometric.rfa family. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. clear Coarse and Medium. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 27 In the Project Browser. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and return to the project file. click Modify.11 On the Design Bar.detail. click Modify. After the new profile is loaded. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . click Visibility. 19 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views.

for Profile. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 43 Press DELETE. click Duplicate. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. select Circular Mullion for Family. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 33 Click Edit/New. 41 In the Project Browser. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . right-click. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. click Modify. 38 On the Options Bar. 37 Click OK twice. double-click GROUND FLOOR. so you remove the unwanted ones. 40 On the Design Bar. You have placed more mullions than you want. 36 Under Construction. 44 Save the file. under Floor Plans.32 In the Element Properties dialog. select All Empty Segments. and click OK.

under Floor Plans. double-click TOP OF ROOF. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. TIP To chain select all the walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. and then apply those custom elements to the system. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. All the inside faces highlight. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 4 On the Design Bar. you learned to create a curved curtain system. In this lesson. select Defines slope. 5 On the Options Bar. and press TAB. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and you can click to select them all. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Pick Walls. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . make custom curtain panels and mullions. and a ruled curtain system. 1 In the Project Browser.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. a storefront system. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems.

9 On the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Roof Properties. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Roof. 10 In the Project Browser. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 14 On the Options Bar. 18 Save the file. click Modify. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. Click OK. click Mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric. select Entire Grid Line. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. under 3D Views. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 600.

select Unconnected for Height. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Wall.Storefront System In this exercise. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter 2400. 5 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 1 In the Project Browser.

The curtain wall cuts the original wall. Storefront System | 551 . click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. and press ENTER. enter 10200 mm. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. 8 Click the temporary dimension. 9 On the Design Bar. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 10 In the Project Browser. and click . This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. click Edit/New. even if the wall height changes. For this wall. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. To see how the grid layout is defined. click Modify.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. under 3D Views. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This specifies an exact length for the wall. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 12 Select the storefront wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. which is specified in the type. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout.

and Offset. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 20 Save the file. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. see the Revit Architecture help. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . enter 15. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. In this exercise. center. 19 Select a curtain grid. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. 16 Click OK. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 1 In the Project Browser. you find Number. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. By setting the Angle value. 18 On the Options Bar. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. select All Empty Segments.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. click Mullion. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. Justification. or end. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. under 3D Views. Angle. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. double-click Southeast Isometric. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and highlight the model line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.3 On the View Control Bar.

554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . A panel between the 2 lines is created. and click . Next. click Curtain Grid. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 10 Select the panel. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.8 Select the highlighted line. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.

14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. select System Panel : Solid. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 18 Save the file. and then eighths. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 16 In the Type Selector. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . and then eighths. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. quarters. Finally. and define a ruled curtain system. quarters. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. right-click. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system.

556 .

mansard. gable. shed. you learn how to add fascia. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. and low sloped roofs. You do not need to create the work plane. In addition. In this exercise. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. you learn to create several different types of roofs. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.Roofs 15 In this lesson. including hip. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In this lesson. gutters. 557 . In this tutorial. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. and soffits to the roofs that you create. Before you can sketch the roof profile. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. and so on). 5 In the Go To View dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all).rvt. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and open Metric\m_Roofs. 4 Click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. centerline. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Training Files. and click OK. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. select Name. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. click the blue square on the witness line. click Ref Plane. expand Floor Plans. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face.

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .

Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 16 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. select Chain. 13 On the Options Bar. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. sketch the roof profile.Next.

click (Join/Unjoin Roof). press TAB. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. click Modify. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . expand Sections (Type 1). and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. expand Views (all). and select the second wall. 21 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. The roof should resemble the following illustration. and double-click Section 1. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. and then select the exterior face of the wall. press CTRL. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 17 On the Tools toolbar. Next.

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Attach for Top/Base. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click model. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 26 On the View toolbar.

1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. and double-click Garage Roof. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. verify that Defines slope is selected. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Pick Walls. and click Yes. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and enter 600 for Overhang. sketch the roof footprint. Next. 5 On the Options Bar. m_Roofs. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.rvt.

The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. click (Properties). 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . By default. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 11 Press CTRL. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. under Dimensions. 8 On the Options Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click the model. click Finish Roof. 15 On the View toolbar. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 13 On the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. select both slope definition lines. 14 When you see the informational dialog. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. and click OK.

The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. expand Views (all). 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. clear Defines slope. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. and enter 600 for Overhang. m_Roofs. When you complete the roof. press TAB. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. click Pick Walls. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.rvt. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 .

15 On the Options bar. add new slope lines to the roof. select Defines Slope. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Finish Roof. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs .6 Click to select all the walls. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 10 On the View menu. select Defines Slope. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. Next. click Modify. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. sketch the chimney opening. click Lines. 9 Using automatic snaps. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click (Rectangle).

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . select Defines slope. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. m_Roofs. and enter 600 for Overhang.18 On the View toolbar. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. and double-click Level 2. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and click (Pick Lines).5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. close the roof sketch. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Next. click Lines. 10 On the Options Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. clear Defines Slope. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click (Trim/Extend). 7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools toolbar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 11 To trim the first line segment. using the following illustration for guidance. select the left vertical slope definition line.

18 On the Design Bar.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Next. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 16 On the View toolbar. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click Finish Roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click (SteeringWheels). 14 Under Constraints. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Modify. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 17 On the View toolbar. click Roof Properties. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof.

Next. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof.21 Click (SteeringWheels). 23 On the Tools toolbar.

and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and double-click Level 2. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. select the left vertical roof line. 6 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 8 On the Tools toolbar. Next. clear Defines Slope. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. m_Roofs. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 9 On the Options Bar. press TAB. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 10 To trim the first line segment. click (Trim/Extend). verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . and enter 300 for Overhang. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click Pick Walls. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. enter 0 for Overhang.

expand Views (all). 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 16 Under Constraints. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. (SteeringWheels). 21 Proceed to the next exercise. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines slope. and double-click 3D. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 20 On the View toolbar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 13 On the Options Bar. click Roof Properties. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. Next. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Modify. expand 3D Views. and press ENTER. you add a slope-defining line. 1 In the Project Browser. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. and click OK.rvt. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 19 On the View toolbar.

expand Floor Plans. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. click Modify. Before you can add slope arrows. 7 On the Options Bar. you need to add two reference planes. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. and double-click Level 2. clear Defines Slope. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 12 On the Options Bar. Next. add two new slope arrows. expand Views (all).2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. click (Pick Lines). 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. Next. and enter 600 for Offset. 9 On the Tools menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. To help locate the position of each split. click Slope Arrow. 5 On the View menu. click Ref Plane. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 11 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. click Split Walls and Lines. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 3 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Options Bar.

2 Select the gable roof over the garage. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof.rvt. When eave heights differ. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Begin the tail at the right reference plane. and double-click Garage Roof. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. select Slope for Specify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Repeat steps 13 . 3 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. and click 19 Under Constraints. enter 500 for Rise/1000. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. (Properties). 20 Under Dimensions. click Modify. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you sketch a hip roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. expand Views (all). the adjacent eave heights must align. 18 Press CTRL. expand Floor Plans. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. m_Roofs. and then click OK. click Edit. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. and move the cursor to place the arrow.15 to add the second slope arrow. select both slope arrows. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.

11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 14 If you want to save your changes. click Finish Roof. click Save As. on the Options Bar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. on the File menu.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 5 On the Options Bar. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . click Align Eaves. and save the exercise file with a unique name. (Properties). 16 Proceed to the next exercise. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. select a method to align the eaves. Next. 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. under Dimensions. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. When aligning eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. The eave lines display with a dimension. and click OK. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. select Defines Slope. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576.

Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. click Modify.rvt. expand Views (all). under Constraints. on the Options Bar. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 3 Select the roof and. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. (Properties). 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. and double-click North. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.

6 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). click Finish Roof. under Dimensions. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. and select the remaining three lines. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 14 On the Options Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. and double-click Level 3. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Lines. expand Floor Plans. and then select Defines slope. press TAB. Next. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click . click (Pick Lines). 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Training Files. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system.rvt. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. you add a roof to a building shell.17 On the View toolbar. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. click Save As. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click mansard roof. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. After you add the roof. on the File menu.

verify that Defines slope is not selected. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the drawing area. double-click Roof. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. click Pick Walls.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 3 On the Design Bar.

you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. and click OK. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. select Steel Truss . 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Insulation on Metal Deck . click (Trim/Extend). 11 On the Design Bar. for Type. 7 On the Tools toolbar.EPDM.Because the walls are not continuous.

under Floor Plans. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. double-click Roof. In the next steps. The roof has been created. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. click (Draw Split Lines). and click to select it. double-click the section head to open the section view.

add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 20 Using the same method. 18 Move the cursor down.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . move the cursor horizontally to the left. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. and select a point on the opposite roof line.

Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. exact placement of the points is not important. (Add points). on the Options Bar. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. 23 On the Options Bar. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. In this exercise. You modify the points individually.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. click (Modify Sub-Elements). You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Next. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 .

click (Modify Sub-Elements). The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. enter -2''. for the dimension. 25 Using the same method.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. and press ENTER. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points.

Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. click (Properties). as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 31 Select the roof slab. including the interior edges of the roof regions. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 .27 Press and hold CTRL. and on the Options Bar. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. for Elevation. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 4''. and select all of the roof edges. and press ENTER. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab.

The slab has not responded exactly as intended. select Variable. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. and soffits in Revit Architecture. under Construction. Creating Fascia. By making the insulation layer variable. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating Fascia. you can easily create its fascia. on the File menu. gutters. click Edit. click Edit/New. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 35 Click OK 3 times. and Soffits on page 586. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. for the Thermal/Air Layer. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. Gutters. and Soffits In this lesson. In some cases this type of slope is desired. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 37 If you want to save your changes. After you create a roof. you learn how to create roof fascia. gutters. The entire slab is sloped. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. and soffits. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. for Structure. 36 View the results in the section view. Gutters. click Save As.

6 In the Element Properties dialog. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and click OK. 5 On the Options Bar. and click Open. click Training Files. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Properties). 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . and click OK twice. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. under Construction.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Press CTRL. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click Training Files. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. enter Built-up Fascia.rvt. 8 In the Name dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate.

c_Condominium.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 2 On the Options Bar. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Gutters on page 588. click (Properties). Creating Gutters In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 13 On the Design Bar.

select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. and click OK. click in the Value field for Material. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Gutters | 589 . 7 Under Materials and Finishes. under Construction. Creating Soffits on page 590. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. . click Edit/New.3 In the Properties dialog. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Duplicate. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 10 Click to place the gutter. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. and click OK three times.

3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. expand Views. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs .rvt. and double-click Roof. click Pick Roofs.Creating Soffits In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. c_Condominium. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

8 Select the roof. expand Views (all). click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar. and then select the soffit to join them. Creating Soffits | 591 .4 Select the roof. 7 On the Tools menu. 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand 3D Views. click Join Geometry.

click Save As. on the File menu.9 If you want to save your changes. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name.

under Length. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. select mm. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Units dialog. and open Common\c_Area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. click Project Units. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Finally. your values will be different. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Click OK. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. In the final exercise.rvt. 593 . For Unit Suffix. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. If you are using metric units. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. select Millimeters.

click the Room Calculations tab. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Click OK. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. right-click in the Design Bar. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. select Square meters. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. click Settings. select 2 decimal places. the system-computed height defaults to the level. click the Area Schemes tab. These schemes define spatial relationships. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click OK. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. it is not necessary in this exercise. expand Views (all). or 0. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. For Rounding. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. For Unit Suffix. and click Room and Area. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. select m2.3 Under Area.

NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. click Area Plan. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. Click OK.You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. you must manually add these boundary lines. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. To modify the area. 13 In the Project Browser. click Area. under Views (all). 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. you must select one of the reference lines. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. rather than the area tag. If you select No. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. forming a closed loop. 9 Click Cancel. When you select Yes in this dialog. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 12 When the informational dialog displays. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building).

the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 21 On the Options Bar. click Area Plan. Next. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Area Boundary. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Click OK. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). and store area.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. common areas. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.

22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. When you pick the walls. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. and click to select the area. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. click ■ . NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 23 On the Design Bar. If you do not select this option. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. click Area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . you can either draw them or pick them.When you add area boundary lines. click Modify. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model.

click Area. In the Element Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click Modify and select the area. 29 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. Select Office area for Area Type. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Click OK.■ ■ Select Office area for Area Type. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Select Building Common Area for Area Type.

■ Click OK. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and select Store Area for Area Type. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. enter Core for Name. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. 35 Add an area to the building model core.

and click to place the legend. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Save. 37 On the File menu. and click Save. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. In the next exercise. click Color Scheme Legend. name the project Area-in progress. In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area.

click Schedule/Quantities. select Area Type and click Add. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . select Areas (Rentable). 8 Add the fields Area and Name. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 7 Under Available fields.3 When the dialog displays. click the Fields tab. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. and click OK. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .9 Click OK.

building elements. In this tutorial. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. floors. After you make building elements. volume. and roofs. and perimeter information. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. curtain systems. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. and floors. If you modify a massing face. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you then need to update the building face. 603 . you can specify the view to display massing elements. You assign the default wall. After creating mass floors. At any time. roofs. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. floor. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. or both. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell.

click Create Mass. double-click Level 1. and cutting geometry. and click Massing.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Training Files. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. sweeps. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. under Floor Plans. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions.rvt. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . The Design Bar title changes to Mass.

(Line). Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 10 In the Materials dialog. click the value for Material. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 .6 On the Sketch Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. and click OK. 13 On the View toolbar. and click OK. under Materials and Finishes. click (Default 3D View). for Offset. click Extrusion Properties. under Floor Plans. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and on the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. (Pick Lines). under Constraints. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. click 18 On the Options Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. for Extrusion End. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. under Views (all). enter 1550 mm. for Name. enter 25000. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 16 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Opaque).

21 On the Design Bar. enter 27500. double-click West. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). 23 In the Materials dialog. enter 25000. 28 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. select Pick a plane. click the value for Material. click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. under Views (all). 30 In the drawing area. 25 On the Design Bar. and click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. double-click {3D} to see the results. press TAB to highlight the entire face.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. The second form is on top of the first form. for Name. and click OK. and click OK. TIP If necessary. select Mass (Transparent). for Extrusion Start. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Constraints. highlight the larger form. for Extrusion End.

click Lines. 34 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. (Pick Lines). 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and click to select the line start point. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . Next. click (Arc passing through three points). click (Draw). 37 On the Options Bar.31 Click to select the face. and clear Chain.

608 | Chapter 17 Massing . 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and delete the vertical construction line. click (Move). under Views (all). 39 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown.TIP If you do not see this option. 45 In the Project Browser. 41 On the Edit toolbar. (Line). double-click East. click the arrow next to the drawing options. click Edit Top. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 46 On the Design Bar. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. click Lines and.

verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. (Arc passing through three points). click Finish Sketch. for Material. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 52 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). 53 On the View toolbar. 50 On the Design Bar. In the next exercise. click Blend Properties. In this exercise. click 49 Create an arc as shown. 54 Proceed to the next exercise.48 On the Options Bar.

5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 2 In the drawing area. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click Ref Plane. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options bar. and select Chain. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 7 Using the same technique. select the mass. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. as shown. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. click (Line). 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise.rvt. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . m_Massing_Start. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element.

enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 15 Click OK. click (Default 3D View). click Extrusion Properties. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 14 Under Constraints. Using Swept Blends In this exercise.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. Using Swept Blends | 611 . enter 0. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. 17 On the View toolbar. for Extrusion End. In this exercise. When sketching each extrusion. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. snap the corners to the intersections. on the View Control Bar. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing.

under Floor Plans. m_Massing_Start.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. ■ For the radius. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. click Sketch 2D Path. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass.rvt. and click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. double-click Level 1. select a point below the mass elements. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass.

verify that <By Sketch> is selected. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 6 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. Using Swept Blends | 613 . as shown.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. click (Rectangle). click Finish Path. 8 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. click Profile 1. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). The only way to align these elements is visually. click Lines. and click Edit.

as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . and press ESC. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion.13 On the Tools toolbar. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. 17 Using the same method. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. click Profile 2. click Finish Profile. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click (Align). 15 On the Design Bar.

21 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Transparent). click Swept Blend Properties.18 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 615 . click Finish Swept Blend. 22 Click OK twice. click <By Category>. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . 23 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile.

click Finish Mass. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. Finally. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. In this exercise. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. You place several instances of the mass families into the project.rvt. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it.24 On the Design Bar. you create new family types from a mass family file.

enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 6 For Width. 5 Click New. and click Apply. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. enter 46000mm. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. for Depth. and click OK. 8 For Width. for Depth. enter 9000 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 15000mm. enter 18000 mm. 9 Click OK. enter 68000 mm. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 6000 mm. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and click OK. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. enter 11000 mm. click Family Types. enter 12000 mm. for Height. click New. and click Apply. for Depth. 4 In the Family Types dialog.rfa.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Other. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Height. and for Name.rfa. for Width. for Height. and click OK. 7 Click New. enter 18000 mm. and for Name. and click Apply. In this exercise. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar.

rfa. click Place Mass. 1 If not already selected. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. and Triangle. 3 On the View Control Bar. on the View toolbar. Semi Barrel Vault. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 8 In the Type Selector.rvt. You also load other existing mass families and place them.rfa family files. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Open the Box-Training. Arc Dome. 2 In the Project Browser.rfa. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. as shown. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing .rfa. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. click Training Files. double-click Site.

21 On the Options Bar. select the triangle. 11 Select the box. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. click Place Mass. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 16 On the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. and on the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 90 for Angle. and click OK twice.10 On the Design Bar. select the 3 boxes. 14 In the Type Selector. as shown. 24 On the Design Bar. for the Material parameter. click Modify. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. click Modify. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . click (Element Properties). 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 17 Press CTRL. and click (Element Properties). 25 In the drawing area. and click to place the mass. select Rotate after placement. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Opaque).

for the Material parameter. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. specify Mass (Opaque). and click (Element Properties). 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. 29 In the Type Selector. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.26 Select the triangle. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 33 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 30 Place the box mass family as shown.

Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . click (Default 3D View).rvt file. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. (Join Geometry). NOTE When you join geometry.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. you join these mass elements. In this exercise. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. In the next exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise.

on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Views (all). 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. 4 Select the triangle. double-click Site. click (Mirror). Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser.

(Join Geometry). for Axis. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. enter SM. click (Default 3D View). and then select the triangle. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click 14 On the Tools toolbar.8 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). 17 Press ESC to see the result. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. as shown. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first.

(If Design Options is already selected. 1 On the Design Bar. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. click (Add to Design Option Set).) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. and select the triangle mass element.rvt. click Modify. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. you joined mass elements together. do not clear the check mark. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.In this exercise. 2 On the Window menu. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.

8 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. 14 In the drawing area. 17 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . for Angle. under Views (all). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. clear Curved. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 7 In the Type Selector. enter 90. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. specify Mass (Transparent).4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. click Place Mass. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. for the Material parameter. double-click Site. 13 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. select Sloped (primary). 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. and click OK. click Place Mass. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. click Modify.

It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. for the Material parameter. TIP To find the correct shapes. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. under Elevations. and click OK twice. under Views (all). double-click North. select the three arc domes. and watch the status bar. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. While pressing CTRL. under 3D Views. and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. select Curved. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. clear Sloped. 19 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Add to Design Option Set). and click (Element Properties). under Views (all). move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. 23 On the View Control Bar. double-click {3D}.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. specify Mass (Transparent). 22 In the Project Browser.

click (Design Options). you can make it the primary option. click Make Primary. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. In this exercise. 35 On the File menu. select Curved and. and click Close. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. under Option. 31 Click the value for Design Option. and click OK. select Curved from the Design Option menu.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 34 Close the warning that displays. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. click the Design Options tab. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 33 In the Design Options dialog.rvt. you placed mass elements into Design Options. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.

628 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click (Pick Faces). select Basic Wall: Exterior . 2 On the View toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Wall Centerline.Brick on CMU. click Training Files.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 5 In the Type Selector. and for Loc Line. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. under Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. you pick massing faces to create walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Wall by Face. double-click {3D}. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 5. under Views (all). 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). double-click Level 3. under Views (all). 14 In the Project Browser. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 15 On the Design Bar. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 .

If desired.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. under Floor Plans. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Wall by Face. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. double-click Level 9. under Views (all). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

perimeter. and Walls. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . When you select levels. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. 8 On the Design Bar.rvt. select all levels. and click OK. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Modify. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. clear Curtain Panels. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). click Mass Floors. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. Curtain Systems. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 Click OK. volume. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and exterior surface area. 1 In the Project Browser.

12 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Mass Floors. click Modify. 10 Press CTRL.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. select Levels 1-4. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. and click OK.

15 Press CTRL.14 On the Options Bar. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. select Level 1. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. click Mass Floors. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. and click OK.

rvt. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). under Category. select Mass Floor. The Floor Area. and click OK. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Floor Volume. Floor Perimeter. press and hold SHIFT. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing .In this exercise. schedules can be created using the mass floors. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Available fields. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. and click Add. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Floor Area. 4 Using the same method. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. and select Level. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

for Usage. and click OK. for Sort by. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . enter Retail.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. select Mass: Family and Type.

You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 13 With Usage selected. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Move Up until Usage is listed first. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. and click Remove. select Mass: Family and Type. under Other. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. After you assign usage. under Scheduled fields (in order). expand Schedules/Quantities. 14 Select Level. for Fields.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted.

and click Rename. and click OK. 16 On the Formatting tab. and click OK.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. select Level. click Edit. 18 On the Filter tab. 24 In the Project Browser. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . for Filter. under Other. 23 In the Rename View dialog. select Usage. for Filter. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. for Filter by. select Usage. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. under Other. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 20 Click in the title of the schedule. elevation. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and in the field below. for Field formatting. and plan views. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. click Edit. select Floor Area. for Then by. 22 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. under Fields. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. and click Properties. enter Hotel. and select Grand totals. 19 Click OK twice. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Sort by. select Calculate totals. in the field under Filter by. 27 Click OK twice.

rvt. double-click {3D}. floor perimeter. by level. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. The mass floor schedules list. click Roof by Face. you created mass floor schedules. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. the floor area. 1 In the Project Browser.In this exercise. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. under Views (all). 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create roofs.

click Create Roof.400mm. select Basic Roof : Generic . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 5 On the Options Bar. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements.4 In the Type Selector. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. click Create Roof.

click Create Roof. and Walls.8 Using the method you just learned. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. select Curtain Panels. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 13 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. select Sloped Glazing. In this exercise. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. in the Type Selector. and click OK. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. Curtain Systems.

verify that Select Multiple is selected. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . click Create System. 6 On the Options Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. click Curtain System by Face. 5 Press CTRL. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.

7 Using the same method. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass.

create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 11 Using the same method. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.9 On the Options Bar. click Create System. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 .

12 Click Modify to exit the command. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. you change the size of an existing mass family. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.

Curtain Systems. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. and click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. double-click Site. enter 30000. Floors. click Modify. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. Next. 2 On the View menu. Roofs. 6 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). 7 On the Options Bar.1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. clear Exclude Design Options. and Walls. under Floor Plans. for Width. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . clear Curtain Panels. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. under Views (all). 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

double-click Level 1. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . In the next steps. 12 On the View Control Bar. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Floor Plans.

you want to select the smaller one. 17 Select the roof as shown. click OK. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. 16 On the View toolbar. Also.TIP To select the curtain wall. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Remake. click (Default 3D View). Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 .

click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .

rvt. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.20 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . you changed the size of an existing mass family. 1 Open the 3D view. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click All to select all categories. and click OK. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 9 Select Mass. right-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 3 In the Project Browser.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 6 On the Model Categories tab.Massing only. 4 Rename the view 3D . Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.

This concludes the massing tutorial.In this exercise. If desired. to the building shell. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. such as columns and an extruded roof. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. You might create the model shown.

652 .

By grouping objects. 653 . and typical office layouts. or with those working on a different project. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. You can also nest groups within other groups. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. The new group is considered nested within the host group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you add the new model group to a previously created group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. In another exercise. Creating. When you make changes to a nested group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. place. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. For example. In this tutorial. the host group is also updated automatically. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. After you create a model group. Modifying. In this exercise. and modify repetitive units. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. You mirror one instance of the group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. you not only simplify their placement. you also simplify the modification process. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. all instances in the building model are updated. hotel rooms.

click Training Files. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . enter ZR. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. and double-click First Floor. expand Views (all). 2 Click in the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.rvt.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . enter Typical Kitchen. and click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. click (Group).

7 On the Design Bar.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Modify. select the center control for the group origin.

Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click Create Instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. expand Model. right-click Typical Kitchen. under Groups.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click (Mirror). 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy.14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. and one rotated. as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . one mirrored. click Modify.

Modifying a Group In this exercise. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modifying a Group | 661 . and click Save. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. press TAB to highlight the wall. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you make changes to an instance of a group. and click to select it. When you finish editing.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. click Save As.rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

click Modify. press TAB.). and click member to group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the door. 7 Click (Group Member. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door. select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 8 On the Design Bar.3 Click (Group Member. and click to select the wall. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. NOTE To display an excluded element.).). Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).

and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. move the cursor to the left. 10 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Selector.127mm. clear Tag on Placement. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Door. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Group | 663 . click Wall.

click Modify. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 23 In the drawing area. click Edit Group. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. In edit group mode. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 21 On the Options Bar. move the cursor up. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow.17 On the Design Bar. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall.

you add the Typical Kitchen group. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Modify. Nesting Groups In this exercise. 26 Select the opening. click 28 For Base Offset. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. and the wall and folding doors for the closet.25 On the Design Bar. for Unconnected Height. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. enter 1000. created in an earlier lesson. 29 On the group editor toolbar. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 2134. (Element Properties). Nesting Groups | 665 . When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. which acts as the host. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click Finish.

in the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 5 In the drawing area. click Edit Group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. select the Typical Kitchen group. under Floor Plans. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. click (Add to Group).Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . double-click First Floor.rvt. 4 On the group editor toolbar.

click Finish. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. and each of the bifold doors. under Floor Plans. double-click Second Floor. 7 On the group editor toolbar. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 8 In the Project Browser. select the wall between the folding doors. Nesting Groups | 667 .6 Press TAB.

and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and filled regions. double-click First Floor. such as door and window tags. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. under Floor Plans. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group.rvt. In the next exercise. you add door tags to a group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . such as text. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise.

and select a point below the left elevator.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 7 On the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 4 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click Filled Region.

17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. click (Group). 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 9 On the Options Bar. and select the text note and the filled region. click to add an arc leader. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 14 On the Edit toolbar.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. and on the Design Bar. 16 In the drawing area. 12 Enter Tile. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click OK. click Modify. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. click Text.

18 On the Design Bar. under Groups. expand Detail. 20 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . and click Create Instance. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. double-click Second Floor. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the drawing area. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. Because the detail group contains variables. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Modify.rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. clear Leader. double-click First Floor. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. as shown. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping .manner that a drawing component can be added. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 3 On the Options Bar.

Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . and click OK. click (Group). select Door Tags. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. double-click Second Floor. for Attached Detail Group Name. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click Check None. 8 In the Filter dialog. under Floor Plans. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags.7 On the Options Bar. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit.

the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click Place Detail. and click OK. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. therefore. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. When you load the group from the library into a new project.

In this case.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. click OK. 12 On the Design Bar. click Desktop. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 3 For File name. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Save Group. under Groups\Model. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). A warning dialog displays. verify that Same as group name is selected. browse to the Desktop. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. select 2 Bedroom Unit. and expand Model. expand Groups. verify that Project is selected.rvt. and click Save. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Modify. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. for Create new. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. and click OK. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. accept the default template file. and click Create Instance. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt.

verify that Attached Details is selected only. 24 In the message dialog. click Link. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click OK. click Use Existing. click Bind. click Modify. 23 In the confirmation dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. and the link is removed. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 20 On the Options Bar.rvt. When a group is converted to a link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 18 In the Project Browser. click Remove Link. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file.rvt file is added as a link to the project. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. expand Revit Links.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 17 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. and click OK. select the linked Revit model.

you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. and walkways. and then modify the data. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. islands. 677 . Using Site Tools In this lesson.Site 19 In this tutorial. you add a building pad to the site. In the final exercises. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. You add property lines manually. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. convert the data to a table.

and click Site. 4 On the Options Bar. and double-click Site. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. Using the first method. you create a toposurface using two different methods. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In the second part of this exercise.rvt. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. expand Views (all). TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. expand Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Toposurface. click Point. This project file was created using the default metric template. and open Metric\m_First_Project. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Design Bar.

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Use the following illustration as a reference. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.

11 On the Design Bar. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. and click OK. enter 1500mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. Use the following illustration as a reference. click Site Settings.8 On the Options Bar. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 15000mm. under Increment. click Finish Surface. 12000mm. under Additional Contours. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 12 On the Settings menu. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 13 In the Site Settings dialog.

on the Standard toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. click the elevation value. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 15 On the View Control Bar. modify the level names and elevations. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 19 On the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. under Views (all). click Modify. and double-click South. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click to delete it. (SteeringWheels). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Default 3D View).This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click to view it at various angles. Before importing the contour data. and press ENTER. 18 In the Project Browser. enter 1000mm. 14 On the View toolbar.

click Yes. click Pin Position. click Training Files. and click OK. and press ENTER. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. it is considered an import symbol. 30 On the Edit menu. For Layers. select Preserve. 23 Click the Level 1 text. double-click Site. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. under Views (all). Until it is exploded. For Colors. 24 In the Project Browser. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Verify that Current view only is not selected. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . rename the level Basement. and press ENTER. select Specify. 28 On the Design Bar.21 Click the Level 2 text. 29 Select the imported topography. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. rename the level Base Site Elevation. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. Click Open. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import.

click Visibility/Graphics. clear Elevations. 32 On the View menu. select it. and click OK. click Modify. and then click OK. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . When you select the import symbol. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 34 Under Visibility. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. click Toposurface. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed.31 On the Design Bar. click the Annotation Categories tab. when the edges highlight. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. clear C_INDX. 36 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (Default 3D View). you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. click Finish Surface. 42 On the View toolbar. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Using the second method. this project file is required in its current state.rvt. name the project Site-in progress. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. Using the first method. 39 On the Design Bar. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. and click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you add property lines using two methods. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . 40 On the View toolbar. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click (SteeringWheels).

If you have not completed the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. Site-in progress. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Adding Property Lines | 685 . do so before continuing. and click OK. Select and delete the right vertical line.rvt. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. select Create property lines by sketching. double-click Site. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Lines. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. click Property Line. Although you can use your preferred sketching method.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. click Lines. Click Modify. under Floor Plans.

10 In the Property Lines dialog. click OK. add an arc line on the right. click OK. 686 | Chapter 19 Site .■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. click Property Line. on the Standard toolbar. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. when they highlight. select the lines. 6 On the Design Bar. click 12 On the Design Bar. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. select Edit Table. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. to delete them. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. A warning dialog is displayed. 9 In the warning dialog. click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Property Lines dialog. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 15 Starting in Row #1. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 19 In the Tags dialog. click to place the property lines. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. If the gap is not closed. 16 Click OK. Adding Property Lines | 687 .

click Training Files. 30 On the View Control Bar. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. In the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. 27 On the Options Bar. In the final step. you created two sets of property lines. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. click the Imported Categories tab. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. right-click in the Design Bar.dwg and click OK. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. and click Drafting. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. the original DWG file remains visible in the view.rfa. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 25 Under Visibility. Before adding property line segment tags. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. 23 On the View menu. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. click Visibility/Graphics. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. and click OK. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to place it. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible.20 Click Load. 22 In the Tags dialog. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. The tags display more prominently in this view.

Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. select Topography. Under Range Type. 7 Click OK. enter 1000. Under Line Color. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. select Single Value.0mm. for Subcategory. enter the name Working Contour. 2 On the Settings menu. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Contour Line Display. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. 10 Under Additional Contours. Under Subcategory. In the Object Styles dialog. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. click New. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. click Site Settings. Under Line Pattern. select Working Contour. and click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. select a shade of Brown. select Dash dot.rvt. Site-in progress. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . click Object Styles.

you create topographic subregions to define roads. The next exercise requires a new training file. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. you create subregions in order to define roads. and islands. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Working Contour. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.11 Click OK. In the next exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. parking areas. The object style subcategory. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. and islands. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . parking areas. In this exercise. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. such as material. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. Although the exact dimensions are not important. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner.rvt. click Training Files. 2 On the Design Bar. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. click Subregion. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. and open Metric\m_Site. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. In the left pane of the Open dialog. try to replicate the location and proportion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . click Lines.

and click to open the Materials dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. under Materials and Finishes. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. and click OK. click Properties. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. enter Parking for Name. select Site . click Finish Sketch. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 692 | Chapter 19 Site .Tarmacadam for Name. 6 In the Materials dialog.NOTE In the Metric training file.

the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. and double-click Topography Schedule. click Edit Boundary.9 On the View Control Bar.Tarmacadam. 14 On the Options Bar. As you create new subregions. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. they display within this schedule. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site .

Delete overlapping lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . Notice that the project area has increased. click Subregion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 22 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. double-click Topography Schedule. click Lines. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. In this training project. 16 On the Design Bar. Within each subregion. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the View Control Bar. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. under Floor Plans.

click the value for Material. and click OK. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. and click OK.23 In the upper-right parking area. and click to open the Materials dialog. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. click Properties. enter Island . 30 In the Project Browser. under Materials and Finishes. 29 On the View Control Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. select Site . double-click Topography Schedule. 24 On the Design Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 .Grass for Name.Grass for Name. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. under Identity Data. click Finish Sketch. 26 In the Materials dialog.

35 On the Design Bar. You must sketch each region separately. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . double-click Topography Schedule. click Subregion. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 696 | Chapter 19 Site .walkway. double-click Site. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. and apply the material Site . under Floor Plans. 32 In the Project Browser. Name the subregion Walkway. Name each region Island Grass. under Floor Plans.Grass. 34 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities.31 In the Project Browser. click Lines. double-click Site. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.

37 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. click Finish Sketch. there is still only one toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. Notice that the schedule has been updated. under Schedules/Quantities. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion.

name the project Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rvt. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. When you use the grading tool. this project file is required in its current state. 2 Select the toposurface. double-click Site. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser.

under Phasing. select Existing for Phase Created. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. click Modify. click (Element Properties). see the tutorial. A warning dialog is displayed. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Select and Edit. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 8 Select the topographic surface.3 On the Options Bar. Using Phasing on page 761. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . RELATED For more information regarding phasing. select Copy Internal Points. click Graded Region. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface.

10 Press DELETE. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

and new. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. Grading the Toposurface | 701 .Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. demolished.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 19 On the View Control Bar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 18 On the View toolbar. click Finish Surface. 17 On the Design Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Point. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View).13 Press DELETE. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm.

it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. under Phasing. only the original toposurface displays. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. specify New Construction for Phase. 23 Select the toposurface. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. When you add a building pad. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. click View Properties. 24 On the View menu. (SteeringWheels).20 On the View toolbar. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. and click OK. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. specify Existing for Phase. click View Properties. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. under Phasing. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Only the graded topography displays. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. you can delete it. click to view it at various angles. this project file is required in its current state. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Therefore. you create a building pad. and delete it.

under Floor Plans. click Pad. the Pick Walls command is active. Site tutorial-in progress. click Lines. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. If you have an existing building model. double-click Site.rvt. click Finish Sketch. 2 On the View Control Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. 6 On the Design Bar. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. NOTE By default. 704 | Chapter 19 Site .

Notice the new building pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 9 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View). For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. 8 On the View toolbar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Adding Site Components on page 706. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 On the View Control Bar.

Adding Site Components In this exercise.90 deg. click Parking Component. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. double-click Site. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select the parking space. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 5 On the Design Bar. 706 | Chapter 19 Site .rvt. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 8 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 707 . click (Default 3D View). Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.

Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. click Site Component. choose any tree type. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 708 | Chapter 19 Site .9 On the View toolbar. Notice the new parking spaces. 12 In the Type Selector. click (SteeringWheels). and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

click (SteeringWheels). 14 On the View toolbar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Default 3D View). 15 On the View toolbar. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. Adding Site Components | 709 . NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

and click Apply. click Apply. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click OK. click Hidden Line. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed.rvt. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. Site tutorial-in progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. this project file is required in its current state. 5 On the View menu. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. double-click Site.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . under Floor Plans.

The exact position of the dimensions is not important.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. Click up and to the left. to position the shoulder of the leader. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. as shown: 10 Using the same method. In the following exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Click again to the left to position the leader. outside of the site. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance.

13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 Press and hold CTRL. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. click Modify.

You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial.■ Clear Leader. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. this project file is required in its current state. you create a parking schedule.

6 Click the Formatting tab. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Mark. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . The parking schedule is displayed.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. number the first three spaces consecutively. click the Fields tab. select Type. click Tile. 10 In the Project Browser. 4 Under Available fields. under Floor Plans.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress. 11 On the Window menu. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. and click Add. 7 Under Fields. If necessary. and under Heading. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 9 On the Window menu. and click OK. 8 Under Fields. click Close Hidden Windows. select Mark. and click OK. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. 12 In the Site plan. 5 Under Available fields. under Space. select Parking for Category. double-click Site. under Views (all). select Type. 13 In the Parking Schedule. enter Size. enter Space. and click Add. and under Heading.

This allows you to know which space you are numbering. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 .Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. under Space. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 14 In the Parking Schedule.

716 .

a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. After the project is shared. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. A workset is a collection of building elements. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. Working in a shared project In a shared project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. doors. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. Using Worksharing. they cannot make changes to it. called Worksharing. The first time you activate worksets within a project. such as walls. you specify an active workset. such as annotations and dimensions. and click Editable. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. you must first enable Worksharing. and so on. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. floors. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. Elements specific to a view. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. To make a workset editable. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. All other team members can view this workset. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. use Element Borrowing. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. 717 . stairs. however. go to the Worksets dialog. In this tutorial. When you are working on a shared project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. select the desired workset. You can enable Worksharing for any project.

In a multi-story structure. such as a tenant interior. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. In the next exercise. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Team size 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. When setting up Worksharing. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you can select which worksets are open or closed. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. In the lessons and exercises that follow. After learning the fundamentals. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Instead. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project.

designers work in teams. When creating the new worksets. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Team member roles Typically. Regardless of the default setting. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. each team member has control over a portion of the design. When you create a new workset. Experience has shown that. with each assigned a specific functional task. not including the Project Standards. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. for a typical project. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. and View worksets. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Shared Levels and Grids. You should have at least one workset for each person. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. On this tab. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . In most projects. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. As new members create worksets for their own use.

Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. within the local file. For example. the file is saved as the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. Generally. This makes them available to other team members. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. After saving to the central file. When you save to the central file. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. you can select which workset is active. When you save to the central file. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. This is called “Selective Open.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. you should then save to your local file. Therefore. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. When finished or at regular intervals. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . your changes are saved. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. if a workset named Interior was created. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. proceeds as usual. On the Options Bar. When you save locally (to your local file). Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you make that workset editable by you. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. However. however. As you work. you have the option to choose which worksets to open.

Alternatively. reload the latest changes from the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. When working remotely. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. make any required worksets editable. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. To do this. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. In this situation. save to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. and make that workset editable. for instance. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. and then save the local file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. In this instance. you should check out the Materials workset. you work no differently then you would in the office. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. using VPN. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. In this conceptual exercise.

Your username displays as the present owner. and open Common\c_Worksets. under Show. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. click Worksets. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects ." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. In the left pane of the Open dialog. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. and notice all are editable by you. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. The Worksets dialog displays. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise.rvt. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 3 In the Worksets dialog. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. click Training Files.In the next exercise.

Project Standards. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. expand Floor Plans. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. you can rename the default workset. Only User-Created worksets should display. For example. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. it is better to make them visible by default.When you enable worksharing. Because the interior walls appear in many views. currently named Workset1. 13 In the Rename dialog. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. clear Visible by default in all views. 8 Click OK. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. select Workset1. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. When you initially activate Worksharing. and double-click Level 1. click New. In this simple training project. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. another is assigned the interior layout. 12 Click Rename. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Therefore. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. imagine four users including yourself. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. click OK. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . a third team member is assigned furniture placement. expand Views (all). The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and click OK. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. and Views. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. 14 In the Worksets dialog. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 16 In the drawing area. ■ 5 Under Show. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". In this case. type the name Exterior Shell. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. however. In this training file. For training purposes. clear Families. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 9 Click New. a small number of team members are working on the building model. You do. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog.

17 On the Options Bar. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 29 Click OK. 23 Select all of the interior elements. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click . under Identity Data. 21 On the Options Bar. 19 Click OK. under Identity Data. 20 Select one of the interior walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. select Interior Layout for Workset. including the interior doors. click Visibility/Graphics. stairs. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and walls. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. and click OK. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 26 On the View menu. click . under Identity Data. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click . and click OK. click the Worksets tab.

32 Select Interior Layout. 43 Click OK. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. Now that you have created the central file. click . Create the central file 37 On the File menu. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. double-click Level 2. 44 On the File menu. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. click Non Editable. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 41 In the Worksets dialog. 34 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . click Close. click Visibility/Graphics. select all of the interior elements of the building model. you enabled Worksharing on a project. and click OK. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 42 On the right side of the dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 35 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. If any interior elements remain. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 38 In the Save As dialog. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. click Worksets. 33 In the Project Browser. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. and click OK.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 39 Click Save. 30 On the View menu. make sure you remember the location of this central file. click the Worksets tab. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. under Views (all). but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. click Save As.

you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. expand Views (all). 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 12 Click OK. If you have not yet completed the exercise. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Options. please do so before continuing. 13 On the Window menu. select all the User-Created worksets. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select the central file. click Save As. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 2 In the Open dialog. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. expand Floor Plans. Before working on the model. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 6 On the File menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. check out worksets. In addition. and double-click Level 1. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 11 In the Worksets dialog. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. and select Specify. 15 In the Project Browser. and click Save. and click OK. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 4 Click Open. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select Interior Layout for Name. you create your local file. click Open. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. select Interior Layout. Next. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. In this case. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 7 In the Save As dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. make modifications to the building model. and select Yes for Editable. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. click Worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 8 In the File Save Options dialog.

In the Worksets dialog. If this is selected. Verify that it is cleared. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. however. under Identity Data. notice the Editable Only option. you can still edit this wall. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. click Modify. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Because this element is not owned by another user. 22 Click OK. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. click Worksets. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 24 Click OK.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. click . 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . 18 On the Options Bar. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. click . In this case. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 23 On the File menu. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. 20 Under Constraints. On the Options Bar. and click OK. If it was owned by another user. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. 21 On the Options Bar.

Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior . 29 In the Type Selector. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 34 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 26 Delete the door. click Door. 31 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Wall. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door.126mm Partition (2-hr). 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. The precise location is not important. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner.

you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. two users access the central file through a network connection. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. If you have not yet completed these exercises. and reload the latest changes. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . In this particular case. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. checked out worksets. and save locally immediately afterward. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. save to central. a tooltip. Whenever you save. it is recommended. click Save to Central. When working in your local file. you created your local file. By default. you should perform regular saves. displays the workset as well as the element type. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. please do so before continuing. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. In addition. you should relinquish all worksets. Borrowed Elements is selected. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. which matches the information in the Status Bar. make elements editable. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Throughout the process. In this exercise. add two door openings into the rooms you created.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. leave this file open in its current state. For training purposes. You modified the building model. At the end of a work session. each user must check out worksets. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary.

Regardless of which central file you choose to use. click Open. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. click Options. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. User 2: Create a local file. and click OK. and select Yes for Editable. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. skip the following section. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and proceed to Creating a local copy. and reset the Username to your computer login name. instructions are staggered. enter User 2. For training purposes. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. click Worksets. You now have a local copy of the project. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select the central file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and click OK. 12 In the Save As dialog. under Username. click Save As.rvt. This is a system setting. 7 In the Open dialog. This file is for your use only. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 15 On the File menu. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Options. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. one user has already created a local file. In addition. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and click Save. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. In the following section of this exercise. consider that person to be User 1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 3 On the Settings menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. specifically sequenced. select all the User-Created worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 9 Click Open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. return to the Settings dialog. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 11 On the File menu. and select Specify.

select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. it becomes the active workset. 27 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 23 Click OK. expand Views (all). 24 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1.” 29 Click OK. expand Views (all). Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. User 1: Check out worksets. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 17 Click OK. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Floor Plans. open it now. select the lower exterior wall. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. click Worksets. 19 On the File menu. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and move it upward approximately 2 meters.You are now the owner of that workset. If you only have one workset checked out. click Save to Central. If it is not open. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. modify the building model. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration.

right-click Copy of Level 1. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. under Floor Plans. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. 41 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 43 In the Project Browser. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 37 On the File menu. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. under Views (all). you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. you should create a furniture plan view. User 1: Reload latest worksets. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. click Save to Central. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 46 In the Project Browser. click Reload Latest. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Before adding any furniture. 33 On the File menu. and click Rename. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. click Save to Central. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. The changes User 2 made are apparent. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 42 Select Furniture Layout. select Yes for Editable. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 45 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. When you save to central. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . However. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. click Worksets. and click OK.” 39 Click OK. Click Yes. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. and click OK. 34 In the Save to Central dialog.” 35 Click OK.

63 In the Worksets dialog. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. click Component. 61 Click OK 2 times. click the Worksets tab. rather than Families. click Modify. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 49 On the Design Bar. and click OK. NOTE System families. and click inside any room.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 66 On the File menu. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. choose any desk. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 65 Click OK. 62 On the File menu. click Save to Central. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 50 On the View menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Project Standards. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types.” 55 Click OK. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 48 In the Type Selector. and click OK. the Visible by default option was not selected. 60 In the Rename dialog. 53 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. and click Element Properties. are placed under Project Standards. Therefore. 54 In the Save to Central dialog.200mm. click Edit/New. enter Exterior Wall . click Rename. click Reload Latest. such as Wall Types. click Save to Central. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. under Show. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. click Worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 .

If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise.rvt. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Checking out worksets. click Save As. In the final exercise of this tutorial. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. click Training Files. and published their changes back to the central file. Each user must have network access to the central file. you need to set up your central and local files. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. throughout this training. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 3 In the Save As dialog. 70 On the File menu. select Save to Central. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. finished the previous workset exercises. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. and still have your local files open. select the following. leave this file open in its current state. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. This exercise requires two users and. you save the training file as a central file. At the appropriate point in this exercise. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. click Options. and click OK. Each user checked out worksets. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. User 1: Reload latest. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. As each of you work. There are specific instructions for each user. modified the building model. leave this file open in its current state. select Reload Latest. and save 69 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. and these problems are rectified. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. In subsequent steps.

Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 5 Click Save. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. Next. 6 On the File menu. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. The central file should still be open. On the Settings menu. and click Save. and click OK. This is the local file for User 1. click Open. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. In addition. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and click OK. click Save As. 18 In the Save As dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click OK. and select Specify.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Options. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. This is a system setting. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. click Save As. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Options. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 8 In the Save As dialog. 15 Click Open. and click OK. 13 In the Open dialog. and click Save. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. select Make this a Central File after save. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 17 On the File menu. 12 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. Set the Username to User 2. click Options. return to the Settings dialog. select the central file. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. the user that saved the central file should be User 1.

A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 22 In the Worksets dialog. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. select Exterior Shell. and select Yes for Editable. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select the second window from the top. Afterwards. select the Interior Layout workset. 27 Under Active Workset. 26 In the Worksets dialog. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. double-click Level 1. and click Editing Requests. At this point. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. verify that Editable Only is cleared. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. under Floor Plans. click the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. click Worksets. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 24 Under Active Workset. You are now the owner of that workset. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. select them. 30 On the left exterior wall. After you submit the request. You are now the owner of that workset. and click Open. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and then click OK. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Interior Layout. if any User-Created worksets are not open. and then click OK. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 29 On the Options Bar. click Worksets.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time.

and click OK.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. 36 Click Close. you requested permission to edit the element. In this case. to Local. select the request submitted by User 2. 35 Click Grant. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. and close 39 On the File menu. select Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . and notice the window is in the new location. A message informs you that your request has been granted. click Close. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and the other user granted it. select the following. In this multi-user exercise. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 38 Click OK. click Check Now.

738 .

you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you can have multiple sets of design options. In this tutorial. Using design options. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. At any time in the design process. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. 739 . In addition. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). and each option set can have multiple schemes. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. For example. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file.

the roof and structure systems must work together. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house.rvt. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. therefore. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you set up multiple design option sets. click New. The client has asked you to create various options. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can edit it. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. In the final exercise of this lesson. After you create a design option. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. In the first exercise in this lesson. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. each with multiple design options. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). With the second option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. each is constructed for interchangeability. click Training Files. and delete the unwanted options from the project. you design each of the structural options. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. the only available command is to create a new option set. make your final design decision. under Option Set.In this particular case. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the second exercise. TIP In this exercise. 2 In the Design Options dialog.

Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. and the third column centered between the two. click 12 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. click Edit Selected. By selecting Multiple. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and double-click ROOF TERRACE.3 Select Option 1 (primary). 5 On the View menu. or add a dimension string between the columns. TIP To center the middle column. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. In this case. add three columns. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Column. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 4 In the Project Browser. click Modify. expand Views (all). and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Close. expand Floor Plans. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process.

16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 17 Zoom out and. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 18 On the View toolbar. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. click . using the same technique. In the following illustration. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. A copy of the three selected columns is added.14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. they are difficult to see in this view. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. Because of the size of the columns. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch.

and click at its center to set the beam start point. you add the beams that span the columns. 19 In the Project Browser. click Beam. 21 In the Type Selector. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . click Modify. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. select Round Bar : 50mm.Notice the 12 columns that you added. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a guide. Next. The second click specifies the end of the beam. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. Zoom in on the upper right column. double-click TOP OF CORE. under Floor Plans. 23 On the Design Bar. In it. Adding a beam is a two-click process. You can do this manually or use the Copy command.

select: ■ ■ ■ . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. move down to the next set of columns. and click the center point. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 26 On the Options Bar.25 On the Edit toolbar. zoom into the left column. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 30 On the View toolbar. 28 Zoom out. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click .

36 In the Rename dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . and click OK. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 46 Under Option. 37 Select Option 2 and. click Rename. 33 Click Finish Editing. 41 Under Option Set. and click OK. not a new option set. 32 In the Design Options dialog. enter Beam for New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click New. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. name the option Louvers. click New. under Option. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. enter Structure for New. under Option. 43 In the Rename dialog. 40 In the Rename dialog. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. under Option. enter Brackets for New. enter Roofing for New.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. under Option Set. select Option 1 (primary). 45 Under Roofing. click New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Option Set. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 34 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. click Rename. and click OK. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. click Rename.

48 Under Option. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. it will resemble the following illustration. under Floor Plans. name the option Sunscreen. you create the second design option. When finished. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. This allows you to more easily manage the project. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. under Structure. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 52 Click Close. and click OK. 51 Under Edit.47 Under Roofing. double-click ROOF TERRACE. select Option 2. 53 In the Project Browser. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. Under Now Editing. select Beam. click Rename. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . select Edit Selected. 50 In the Design Options dialog.

58 On the Tools menu. click Align. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 56 In the Type Selector. click Component. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . Refer to the following illustration. select M_Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks.

748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Modify. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . Click to indicate the end point of the move. 61 On the Design Bar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. The first click sets the move start point. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. The second click represents the move end point. on the Edit toolbar. 62 Select the beam and. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam.60 After aligning the beam.

That is because the brackets option is set to primary. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Finish Editing. 67 On the Tools menu. name the file. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 69 Click Close. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.rvt. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. you need this file in its current state. which is visible by default. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. m_Urban_House-in progress. click Save As. 70 On the File menu.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. click . 66 On the View toolbar. and click Save. 68 In the Design Options dialog. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created.

is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 3 In the Design Options dialog. 4 Under Edit. open it now. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. Sunscreen. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. delete them after the rafter is in place. a Louver system. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 8 In the Type Selector. under Roofing. click Component. the other for beams. expand Views (all). 2 On the Tools menu. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. select Louvers (primary). If you need to add dimensions. each with multiple design options to pick from. In the next exercise. With the second option.In this exercise. 5 Click Close. you design each of the roofing options. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you set up multiple design option sets. 6 In the Project Browser. 10 Referring to the following illustration. The first option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. The second roofing system. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. do so now. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. and double-click TOP OF CORE. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise.rvt. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Edit Selected. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Under Now Editing. The dimensions shown are for training purposes.

enter 11750 mm for Length. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click Array. Enter 5 for Number. and click OK. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. Select 2nd for Move To. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click . You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 16 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Edit menu. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Other. Select Constrain. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.

752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 990.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. when the listening dimension displays. and press ENTER. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.

Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 5475 mm for Length. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 With the louver still selected. click Component. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . and select the louver you just placed. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. and click Array. and click OK. Select Constrain. under Other. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click . 26 On the Options Bar. click the Edit menu. 23 On the Options Bar. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 27 For the array starting point. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 20 In the Type Selector. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 34 for Number. Select 2nd for Move To.

and. and press Enter. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 300. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. click . when the listening dimension displays.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 29 On the View toolbar.

the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. Click OK. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. 33 Under Editing. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . In this case. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . under Edit. 30 On the Tools menu. expand Elevations. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. and then click Close. click Edit Selected. and click OK. select Sunscreen. under Roofing. 31 In the Design Options dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. and double-click West. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays.The louver roof system is complete. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 39 On the Design Bar. Therefore. click Lines. 34 In the Project Browser. click Finish Editing. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. 40 On the Options Bar. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option.

click Trim/Extend. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. Under Constraints. 48 On the Design Bar. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Select the right arc.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 43 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Tools menu. the top of the next column on the right. click Finish Sketch. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The first two points define the ends of the line. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 45 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. then you can modify it through the dimension. and the third point defines the arc. 49 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Properties. You will fix this in a later step. click . then the center arc. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 41 Select the top of the left column. The arcs should connect. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End.

Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. do so now. 2 In the Project Browser. After exploring the combinations. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and click Rename. expand 3D Views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Edit. right-click {3D}. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 4 In the Project Browser. and last options.The louver roof system is complete. and click Duplicate. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and delete the discarded design options. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. and then click Close. 52 On the File menu. under Views (all). 51 In the Design Options dialog. click Finish Editing. In this exercise. Managing Design Options | 757 . a Louver system. Managing Design Options In this exercise. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. you select a design. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. enter Primary Option. and click OK. under 3D Views. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. you designed each of the roofing options. make it part of the building model. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. secondary. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 50 On the Tools menu. click Save. Sunscreen. The first option. The second roofing system. you need this file in its current state. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. tertiary.

click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 9 Click OK. and click OK. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.5 Right-click each of the copies. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). under Views (all). double-click Secondary Option. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 On the View menu. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. and click Rename. 11 On the View menu. double-click Primary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible.

17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. and click OK. under Views (all). In your design options. Managing Design Options | 759 . all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Last Option. 15 On the View menu. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. under Views (all). 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. double-click Tertiary Option. under 3D Views. and click OK. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab.14 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. At this point. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this case.

760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. select Make Primary. the current primaries are no longer options. In this exercise. 35 On the File menu. 24 Under Option. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. since you no longer need them. you selected a design. 27 In the alert dialog. under Structure. made it part of the building model. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Delete to remove the views that used options. This was the client choice for structural. An alert is displayed. and deleted the discarded design options. After exploring the combinations. click Yes. click Yes. but should be accepted as part of the building model. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 33 In the Design Options dialog. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 30 Under Option Set. click Close. 26 Under Option Set.22 On the Tools menu. The set is deleted. 29 Select Roofing. Because the client has selected the design option. click Save. 25 Select Structure. 31 In the alert dialog. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Delete. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. double-click Primary Option. 23 In the Design Options dialog. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Accept Primary. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. select Beam.

you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. 761 . For the client. demolish existing construction. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. This changes room definition and total building model area. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation.Project Phasing 22 In any project. and then add new building model elements. You create new phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new phases. complete with schedules. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. In the lesson and exercises that follow. then add new walls and doors in a different location. demolish existing walls and doors. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. In the second exercise. In the second exercise. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation.

Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 5 Select any of the exterior walls. under Phasing. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. click Project Units. During the demolition and renovation process. 6 On the Options Bar. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. go to the Settings menu. are visible in this view. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. define the units. As you add new elements to the building model.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). This means that all building model elements. click (Element Properties). 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. When you create a new project. expand Floor Plans. 7 Click Cancel. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. and double-click Level 1. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. If you wish to do so. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase.rvt. under Phasing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Phasing. click Modify. regardless of phase. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Cancel. In the Element Properties dialog.

This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views.Existing. 17 Click No. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. right-click Level 1. 20 In the Rename dialog. Phasing Your Model | 763 . you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. and click OK. and click OK. right-click Level 1 . and click Rename. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Level 1 . and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. clear Door Tags. under Floor Plans.Demo. and click OK. click . You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. After you release the mouse button. 10 On the Options Bar. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. Because this is a phase-specific view. including the door tags. click (Filter Selection). under Phasing. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. TIP If this were a multi-story building. all of the building model elements.Existing. for Phase Created. 11 In the Filter dialog. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. Because this is a renovation project. and click OK. enter Level 1 . select Existing. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 12 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1 . 16 In the Rename dialog. 14 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. After you create the views. click Modify.Existing. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. are highlighted in red. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser.

Phase status is time-dependent. and click OK. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. 24 In the Project Browser. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. double-click Level 1 . A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. 28 Under Filter Name. 27 Click New. select Overridden. In this case. you modify these settings. select Existing. Later in this exercise. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. enter Composite Plan. click the Phase Filters tab. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New.Demo. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. under Floor Plans. for Phase. Demolished. Because of this time relationship. and Temporary. under Phasing. to which all the building model elements belong. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. however. under Floor Plans. new construction occurs after existing construction. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 29 For Composite Plan. 21 In the Project Browser. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. There are five default phase filters. Next. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under New. 26 In the Phasing dialog. You may need to zoom in to see this. On a logical time line. Existing. double-click Level 1 .Existing.

click the value for Color. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. click (Demolish). Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. 34 In the Color dialog. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. select a lighter blue. 36 Using the same method. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display.31 Under Phase Status. Phasing Your Model | 765 . 33 In the Line Graphics dialog.Demo. select Demolished. Next. or you can use the demolish tool.Existing. 32 In the Demolished row. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. select the line style. you demolish all elements hosted by it. under Cut ➤ Lines. click OK. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 39 In the Phasing dialog. you begin demolition. its display changes to a red dashed line. select red. 42 In the Project Browser. As you click each wall. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. When you demolish the host. There are two ways to demolish an element. double-click Level 1 . 35 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. select the interior walls one at a time. double-click Level 1 .

Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors.Demo. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 52 Open Level 1 . 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Phase Filter. under Phasing. under Phasing. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 In the Type Selector. for Phase Filter.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 53 Open Level 1 . 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and click OK. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 49 On the Design Bar. The demolished walls no longer display.Existing. add a long horizontal wall. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 50 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Door. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. and click OK. 51 Add a door leading into each room. click Wall. select Show Previous + New.

All elements are displayed in this view. 60 On the View toolbar.Demo. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. because the phase filter is set to Show All. The renovated building model plan is displayed. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls.New. which are displayed as red.New. click (Default 3D View). You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. 59 Open Level 1 .The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. Phasing Your Model | 767 . and existing shows as half-tone. new is shown in blue. 62 If necessary. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Level 1 . 61 On the View Control Bar. regardless of phase. 57 In the Project Browser. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter.

go to the Settings menu. and new construction. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. In this view. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags.Demo. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. All room boundaries are phase-specific.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. If you wish to do so. As the renovation process continues. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. 63 Close the file. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. 2 Open Level 1 . sizes. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . You can also see that the room quantities. In the next exercise. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. demolition. 3 Open Level 1 . and double-click Level 1 . define the units. and click OK. Notice that this view is the original building model. you can see the new walls added to the building model. If you wish to save this file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. click Project Units. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. you do not need to change the project units to metric. In this view. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. therefore. In this exercise. expand Views (all). They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. click Training Files. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. In the left pane of the Open dialog.New.Existing.rvt. you can do so at this time. the rooms change in both definition and size.

New. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Use the following illustration as a guide. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. and maximize the view. click Room. 13 Open Level 1 . notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 6 Open Level 1 . 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room Tag. yet they have different room numbers. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 9 On the Design Bar. click Room. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 10 Open Level 1 . click in each room as you move to the right.Existing. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 11 On the Design Bar. In the Phasing dialog. 5 Click OK.Demo.

click Tile. In addition. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. The two schedule views tile. 19 On the Window menu. and double-click Room Schedule .Existing. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 16 In the Project Browser. View phase-specific room schedules. 17 On the Window menu. In this case. 20 Close the file. click Close Hidden Windows. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .New Construction. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 18 Open Room Schedule .15 Using the following illustration as a guide. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. expand Schedules/Quantities. In this exercise. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views.

In this tutorial. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. This maximizes efficiency. performance. modify their visibility. Comparison of alternatives on a site. In these situations. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. You position the building models on the site plan. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. In the final lesson. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. 771 . and manage the links throughout the project. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project.

This center changes as the footprint of your model changes.Linking Building Models In this lesson. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. You link two building models to the project. modify their visibility. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. and the other is a townhouse. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You position the building models on the site. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. One building model is a condominium. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.

3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the file there. select the three files. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. Otherwise. in the Model Linking folder that you created. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. Select c_Site. 8 Clear Read-only. click Open. 5 On the File menu. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. and open Common\c_Site. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. c_Townhouse. All three files now reside.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. RELATED See the lesson. you can do so. click Open. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . ■ ■ Manual .■ Auto . right-click. This option is grayed out. and click Properties. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. 4 On the File menu. Auto .Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Click Open.rvt. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Training Files. however. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. this system is not exposed to the user. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. and click OK. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. with write permission. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. this option will place the link at a predefined location. Manual . click Close. click Save As. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. c_Condo_Complex. 2 On the File menu.

Notice the blue detail lines. click Project Units. expand Views (all). and make your changes. select Auto . expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. 11 On the File menu. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.Origin to Origin. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . If you wish to do so. For Positioning.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. you can go to the Settings menu. 10 In the Project Browser. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 13 Click Open.

click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. After you select it. The first click specifies the move start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . Standard move commands work with linked building models. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 16 For the move start point. 17 For the move endpoint.rvt displays in the Type Selector.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. The second click specifies the move endpoint. The linked model moves as one object. The Move command requires two clicks. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. 15 On the Edit toolbar. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. click (Move).

18 On the View menu. For Positioning. 21 Click Open. select Auto . Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.Origin to Origin. and select c_Townhouse. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .After you specify the location to move to. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines.

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 .The townhouse building model displays above the site model. you first specify the rotation start point. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. click to specify the rotation start point. click (Rotate). To rotate an object. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. and click to specify the end of the rotation. 23 On the Edit toolbar. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. In this case. when the vertical line displays. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise.

click (Move). 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . 30 For the starting point. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. click (Copy). The first click specifies the start point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar.The townhouse is located within its required footprint.

for Name. under Identity data. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 37 On the View toolbar. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click Rotate. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 34 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click (Default 3D View). 32 On the Edit menu. enter Townhouse A. use the Move command to make any adjustments.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. and click OK.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . In this exercise. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. they were placed too low within the site topography. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. After linking the files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 2 On the SteeringWheels. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. In the next exercise. click Save. do so before continuing.38 On the File menu. click and hold Orbit. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. click (SteeringWheels). you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. When you originally linked the files. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation.

under Views (all). and click OK. you first select the plane you want to align to. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. To do this. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. expand Elevations. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. In the steps that follow. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. When using the Align command.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. click (Align).rvt. and double-click South. In this case. when it highlights. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select the line. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. and click to select it. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. 3 In the Project Browser. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. and then select the plane that you want to align. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Click the Revit Links tab.

click 13 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . Both townhouses should be at the proper level. double-click North. 9 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). 12 On the View toolbar. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. under Elevations. 15 On the File menu. 14 On the SteeringWheels. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 11 Return to the South elevation view. This would over-constrain the model.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click and hold Orbit. click Save. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. expand c_Townhouse. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. 10 Click OK. When you link a file. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. you can independently control the visibility settings. under Elevations. 4 Under Visibility. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. scroll down and clear Levels. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In the next exercise. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. 2 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. In this exercise. 9 Under Visibility. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. you need this project file open and in this view.rvt. click By Host View. click OK. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. select <Custom>. display settings. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. By linked view. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. click the Revit Links tab. click Custom. and the halftone settings for each linked project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. As you can see. or Custom. double-click South. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. If the Basics page is set to Custom. do so before continuing. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project.rvt. 8 For Annotation Categories. detail level. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file.

17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. By default. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. click Visibility/Graphics. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. medium. 14 On the View menu. no detail level changes are required.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. on the Basics tab. double-click Level 1. In this case. With linked files. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. 24 Click OK. select <Custom>. You can click the value for Detail Level. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.rvt. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. select Custom. under Display Settings. click By Host View. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. or fine. 20 For c_Townhouse. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 23 In the Model categories list. under Floor Plans. Using the Custom option. and click OK. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . expand c_Townhouse. 16 Under Visibility. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. By selecting custom under Model Categories. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. and then set the detail level to coarse.

phase. In this case. on a sloped site for instance. In the next exercise. All other components are grayed out.rvt. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. demolished. 31 On the File menu. click OK. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. this is preferable. 25 On the Revit Links tab. existing.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. under Visibility. In most cases. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. By default. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. there are situations. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you manage the linked files. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. you need this project file open and in this view. 29 Click OK. click Save. 28 Select By linked view for View range. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. select c_Townhouse. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. all new. 26 Under Display Settings. click Custom for the Townhouse link. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. In this exercise. In this case. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. and phase filter of a specific link. With the Show All filter applied. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. However.

the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. Locations Not Saved. click Yes. 7 Click OK. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 3 Under Path Type. Notice the Loaded. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. select c_Condo_Complex. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. You learn more about this in the next lesson. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. do so before continuing. The default path type is Relative.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. the link is maintained. 5 Click Unload. 4 Under Linked File. 6 At the confirmation prompt. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. They supply information regarding the links. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. click Manage Links. In a shared coordinate environment. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. click the Revit tab. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.rvt. and Saved Path fields are read only. In general. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project.

the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. 8 In the Project Browser. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. If you choose not to open that workset. and click Reload. In these cases. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. 9 On the File menu. When you initially place the link. To do this. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. click Save As. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. In general.rvt. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. the link is not loaded. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. right-click c_Condo_Complex. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. expand Revit Links. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. and select Specify. click the arrow next to the Open button. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. However.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled.

you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. you are establishing a shared origin point. and save it as an RVT file. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. If you have not completed the previous lesson. When used in conjunction with model linking. do so before continuing. The host file consists primarily of site components. leave the project file open in its current view. In the next lesson. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. name the file Site_Project. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). and the resulting project files. If you intend to complete the next lesson now.10 In the Save As dialog. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In this exercise. When you share coordinates between projects. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. In essence.

do so before continuing. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. If you have closed the project. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. In this case. When you are working in the host project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. click Open. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.rvt and click Open. open it before continuing. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. click the Condo Complex. Linking Building Models on page 772. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . As indicated in the Status Bar. If you have not completed the lesson. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to.coordinates are used. 3 In the drawing area. and the resulting project files. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. 2 On the Tools menu. Select Site_Project.

click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. 5 On the Design Bar. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. and Lot C. when the edges highlight. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . but can have multiple additional locations. click to select it. select Location 1. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. even though both models originate from one linked file. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. On the Status Bar. and click OK. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. do so before continuing. In this exercise.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. it is placed at a specific location. Lot B. If you have not completed the exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. However. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. this location is not saved outside of the host project. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. These three locations can be named Lot A. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. you need this project file open and in this view.

enter Lot A for New. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Change. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. This is a one-time operation. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. When constraining a link to a location. click . and click OK. click OK. . This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 7 In the Rename dialog. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. 4 Under Value. and click OK. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. click Not Shared for Shared Location. Record the current position as a location. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. under Instance Parameters. select Move instance to. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. under Instance Parameters. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A.2 On the Options Bar. click Rename. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. 9 In the Select Location dialog. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Reconcile. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. 12 On the Options Bar. In the Choose Location dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once.

click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. and click OK.Notice the OK button is not active. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. ignore the warning. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. Because Lot A is currently in use. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. Record current position as. and then select the townhouse project. click OK. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. and the left townhouse resides at that location. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. The first click specifies the move start point. Notice the OK button is still not active. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . 30 On the Tools menu. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. click Duplicate. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 16 Click Change. To explicitly save a location. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you release the mouse button. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. select the second option. click the Revit tab. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. When you relocate a project. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. When you create a location. The second click specifies the move endpoint. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. By relocating a project. and click OK. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. make sure Lot B is selected. 23 Click Save Locations. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. a warning displays. and click OK. enter Lot B for Name. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. the active location position is moved. This is a two-click process. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. or cancel the action. click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. select Save. click Manage Links. 26 Click OK. you cannot redefine its location. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B.

33 On the Edit menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. and click OK. click Close. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. click Save.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 34 On the File menu. In this exercise. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. select Save. you work in one of the linked projects. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. NOTE In the following exercise. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 36 On the File menu.

rvt file. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared.rvt file. Also. click Open.By Shared Coordinates. 2 On the File menu. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. do so before continuing. Select c_Condo_Complex. it is placed automatically within the host project. If you have not completed the exercises. Click Open. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. Because this building model only has one named location. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. When opening the linked file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The current active location is Lot A. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. double-click 1st Floor. if other models were linked into the same host. For Positioning. under Floor Plans. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. In addition. select Auto .

7 Click OK.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In this exercise. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. 3 In the Name dialog. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . orient a view to true north. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. click Manage Place and Locations. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. In the next exercise. select True North for Orientation. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. you can select Lot C if necessary. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. and click OK. do so before continuing. enter Lot C. If you have not completed the exercises. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. click Manage Place and Locations. you need this project file open and in this view. you manage the shared locations. 6 Select Lot B. you create a new location. click Duplicate. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. and click Make Current. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. click OK. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. In the host file. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Graphics. In this exercise. click View Properties.

7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Select Site_Project. do so before continuing. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. click Close. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. On the Options Bar. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . 10 On the File menu. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. In this exercise. You can save the file if you wish. If you have not completed the exercise. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu.rvt and click Open. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. click Open.

click Schedule/Quantities.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Doors. and click Add. and click OK. click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Count. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files.

Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. under Other. 12 Select Grand totals. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. In this exercise. select Family and Type for Sort by. and then click OK twice. click Save. You have completed this tutorial. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. clear Itemize every instance.8 Click OK. 13 On the File menu. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 14 On the File menu. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. click Close. expand Schedules/Quantities. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. right-click Door Schedule. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . and click Properties.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

journal cleanup options. and set it as your default template. 803 . Notice that the drawing area is black. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. under Template file. These settings control the graphics. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. In the first lesson. selection default options. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. 8 In the New Project dialog. click OK. click Training Files. and your username when using worksets. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. 4 Under Colors. they are not saved to project files or template files. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 3 In the Options dialog.rte. click the Graphics tab.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. notification preferences. select Invert background color. and click OK. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you modify the system environment. you create an office template. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 6 In the New Project dialog. Finally. In the second lesson. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. click Browse. which is independent of the project settings.

click No. select None. 19 On the Design Bar. click the Graphics tab. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. and select the wall. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 11 Under Colors. 26 In the Options dialog. However. clear Invert background color. 13 Click the General tab. When an error occurs. click the Graphics tab. 14 Under Notifications. and click OK. select red. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Click OK. the elements causing the error display using this color. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.10 In the Options dialog. 12 In the Color dialog. and open Metric\m_Settings. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. For Tooltip assistance. select One hour. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. select yellow. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click Wall. click Modify. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the value for Selection color. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click Modify. For Selection color. 22 When prompted to save changes. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.rvt.

For Tooltip assistance. centralized. click Places. notice the list of library names. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. This path is set automatically during the installation process. such as in a large. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. select your preferred Save reminder interval. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. 4 Click Cancel. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. TIP To view a template. family template files. 7 In the Options dialog. These files are used in the software support process. select Normal. and click Browse to select a template. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. If prompted. click Browse. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . 8 Click Cancel. you specify default file locations. and click Open. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. select the folder to save your files to by default. Under Journal File Cleanup. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. including your default project template. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog. Under Username. Your login name displays by default. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 3 Under Default template file. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). click Browse. click the File Locations tab. Specifying File Locations on page 805. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. under Default path for family template files. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. do not save the changes. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. and family libraries. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications.27 Click the General tab. However. 5 Under Default path for user files. 10 In the Places dialog. you can start a new project with that template.

or loading a Revit Architecture file. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. Load. Save. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and you can create new libraries. In the following illustration. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. When you are opening. under Libraries. click (Add Value). and Import dialogs. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.library names and path. saving. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. or families. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click Open. and select it as the library path. and click the icon side of the field. templates. and change the name to My Library. 11 In the Places dialog. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. view the current path. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. If you want to relocate this path. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. and click OK twice. 22 Click Places. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the My Library icon. 28 Click OK. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. This path is determined during installation.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. such as bump maps. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click the Spelling tab. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 9 In the text editor. and Import dialogs. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. custom color files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. click My Library. 5 In the text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. scroll down the list of building industry terms. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. If you work in a large office. 3 Under Settings. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. specify the new location here. 23 Select My Library. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and decal image files. Load. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 24 Click 25 Click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 2 In the Options dialog. Save. 19 Click Cancel. 15 Under Library Name.

18 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. under Template file. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Text. click the Spelling tab. 22 In the text editor. work with snapping turned off. You can turn snap settings on and off. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. In this exercise. 23 In the Options dialog. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close.11 In the Options dialog. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click OK. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 2 In the New Project dialog. 19 Under Settings. click File menu ➤ Save. click Restore Defaults. click Browse. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. delete sheetmtl-CU. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. If prompted. 12 On the Standard toolbar. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click Edit. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. As you zoom in and out within a view. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you modify snap settings. 4 In the New Project dialog. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. do not save the changes.rte. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click Modify. click OK. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Click in the drawing area. 20 Under Personal dictionary. click Training Files. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click default template. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 In the text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. you modify snap increments.

enter SM. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. TIP To zoom while sketching. snapping reverts to the system default settings. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. 8 In the Snaps dialog.. If it does not. 10 On the Options Bar. use the wheel button on your mouse. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. click Wall. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. zoom out until it does so. and enter 500 . 7 Under Object Snaps. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. If you do not have a wheel button. click OK. and move the cursor to the right. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . After you click to place the object at the midpoint. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . While sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. clear Chain. For example. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design.6 Under Dimension Snaps.

Do not set the wall end point. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 18 Enter SM. and specify the wall endpoint. and delete the value 500 . Notice that snapping is once again active. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and move the cursor to the right. 21 Move the cursor downward.. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 24 Click OK. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. If you move the cursor along the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. the midpoint. and the wall edges. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. This is the increment that you added previously. click Modify. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. it will snap to the endpoints. and do not save the file. and click Wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Modifying Project Settings on page 811.

and object styles. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. In the steps that follow. and open Metric\m_Settings. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. you render a region to observe the changes. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. annotations. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. lines. When you apply a material to an element. Using these options. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. save the project file with a unique name.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu.rvt. click Training Files. You create and modify materials. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. fill patterns. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. Modifying Project Settings | 811 .

and texture of the material. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. 10 Click the Graphics tab. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog.Fieldstone material. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. and click (Element Properties). These details will display in rendered images. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. The Render Appearance Library is a local. and click OK. and select Masonry .Fieldstone.Fieldstone. 6 Click Replace. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. and click OK. In the steps that follow. 11 Click OK. 2 Scroll down the materials list. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. read-only library for render appearances. The properties describe the color. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. When you change properties of a render appearance. 9 Click Apply. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project.Stone. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. scale. for Class. In the next exercise. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. this material provides a starting point for the new material. and double-click 02 Entry Level. In the Materials dialog. When a model element is loaded into a project. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. enter Masonry . However. Masonry . select Stone. 3 Click (Duplicate). 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

click Model Graphics Style. 16 Enter the new wall name. and click OK. 23 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 26 On the View Control Bar. 18 For Finish 1. select Masonry . click Edit/New. 24 In the Type Selector. select the rear exterior wall. 25 On the View toolbar.Fieldstone. 21 Click OK three times. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. . Fieldstone on CMU. click Edit.Fieldstone. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. click (Default 3D View).14 In the Element Properties dialog. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry .Brick. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. click in the Material field. click This is the material that you created. 17 For Structure. 15 Click Duplicate. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . 19 On the right side of the Material field. 20 In the Materials dialog.

the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. When finished. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. and click Rendering. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. 28 In the Rendering dialog. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. In the following exercise. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select the render region (a red rectangle). The rendering process begins. click Rendering Dialog. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. for Setting.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. 31 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. 29 In the 3D view. select Region. select Low or Medium. right-click the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. under Quality. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material.

Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Drafting pattern density is fixed. m_Settings-in progress. such as steel. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Zoom into the model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click West. click Import. 3 Under Pattern Type. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 5 Click New. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Then click Render again. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . 7 Under Custom. click Show the model. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. and clear Region. choose Model. in the Rendering dialog. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. select Custom. click Show the model. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns.rvt. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. expand Elevations.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall.

notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . click Edit. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click to select a fill pattern. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click OK. 22 Click OK three times.pat. and click OK. (Element Properties). 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click 15 For Structure.Fieldstone. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for Finish 1. 13 On the Options Bar. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. In the Materials dialog. under Pattern Type. click Modify. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. enter Fieldstone. and click OK. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 18 Under Surface Pattern.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. click .Fieldstone material. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall.56. enter . It is currently assigned the material Masonry . select fldstn. click Edit/New. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. and for Import scale. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Training Files. click in the Material field. select Model. 11 Click OK. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 9 Under Custom. 23 On the Design Bar. 10 For Name.

2 On the keyboard. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. expand 3D Views. click (Default 3D View). m_Settings-in progress. adjust your zoom settings as needed. TIP If the pattern does not display. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. For example. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.25 On the View toolbar. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you.rvt. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. and double-click 3 Windows. there are often multiple window types within a project.

and click . 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 On the Options Bar. and click 15 Click OK twice. click By Category (located under the materials list). 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click Modify. for Trim Exterior Material. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. for Trim Exterior Material. 16 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Value column. . This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties).3 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. click in the Value column. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click Edit/New. 10 Select the arched window. click (Element Properties). click By Category. 9 Click OK twice. 14 In the Materials dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 In the Materials dialog.

descriptions. When you render a 3D view. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 25 In the search field. 18 On the Model Objects tab. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges.red paint. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. select Trim. and select Trim. 28 Under Shading. and click OK. and click OK. or keywords include the word red. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. 19 For Trim. enter Trim . for Name. for Class. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. 29 In the Materials dialog. click OK. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. (Duplicate). the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. type red. select Paint. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. expand Windows. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. . 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. click OK. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. click in the Material column. 23 Click Replace.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

click New. under Category. 11 For Line Pattern. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line.rvt. select Roof Line. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress.31 On the View toolbar. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. for Name. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. is open with the 3D view active. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 10 For Line Color. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Roofs. m_Settings-in progress. (Default 3D view). Now that you have created a line pattern. select Red. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. enter Roof Line. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 7 On the View Control Bar. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog.

double-click to Building.12 Click OK. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style. but not the line pattern. 14 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 13 In the Project Browser. Notice that the line color displays in this view.

and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. double-click 03 Roof. 22 On the Model Categories tab.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. select Black. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Solid. select Roofs. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 15 In the Project Browser. 18 For Line Color. 20 Click OK. click Override. for Visibility. select 5. 19 For Line Pattern. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . sections. For Color. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. For Pattern. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Roof Line. elevations. select Blue. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. select Roofs. under Category. under Floor Plans. Plans.

double-click Site. 29 For Name. select Red. click New.25 Click OK twice. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. under Modify Subcategories. select Double dash. select Zoning Setback. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . For Line Pattern. (Line). 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 2. For Line Color. and click OK. under Floor Plans. enter Zoning Setback. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. Click Click (Draw). select Level: 02 Entry Level. specify the following: ■ For Plane. This places the line above the topography. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 31 Click OK. click Lines. 33 In the Type Selector. 34 On the Options Bar. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles.

824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 40 In the Project Browser. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Default 3D View). and clear Property Lines. under Floor Plans. and clear Zoning Setback. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 38 On the Model Categories tab. 36 On the View toolbar. Expand Site. 39 Click OK. (Default 3D View). Modifying Annotations on page 825. select it. and clear Zoning Setback. 44 On the View toolbar. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE If Site is not selected. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. expand Lines. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click 02 Entry Level. and then clear Property Lines. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 43 Click OK.

(Undo). double-click 02 Entry Level.rvt. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click the default value. click another wall. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Units. 7 Click OK twice. 4 Enter the name Linear . Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 10 On the Standard toolbar. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. click Dimension. click Modify. select Feet and fractional inches. and place a dimension on the floor plan. for Units Format. and then click outside the second wall. m_Settings-in progress.Imperial and click OK. You have created a new dimension style.rvt. 5 Under Text. Modifying Annotations | 825 . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click Duplicate. To place a dimension. click one wall. select Linear .Imperial.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. 9 In the Type Selector. m_Settings-in progress.

Leave M_Window Tag . notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 22 Under Loaded Tags. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value.14 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. click the bottom window. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 18 In the Tags dialog. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 19 Click Load. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 23 Click OK. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 27 On the west wall. click Training Files.Number. 26 On the Options Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Number. In the steps that follow. click M_Window Tag . you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. select the 3 window tags. In the preview image.rfa. 28 On the Design Bar. Then press Delete.Number as the assigned tag. notice that the label displays 1i. click (Element Properties). scroll down to Windows.Number is now the assigned tag. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 16 Click Cancel. under Category. 21 In the Tags dialog. 24 While pressing CTRL.

rvt. 8 Under Walls. dimension values display using this setting. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. for Rounding. click the default value. Specifying Units of Measurement. you specify the project units of measurements. notice Window Tags appears twice. the other displays the instance value. click Modify. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 2 In the Project Units dialog. select To the nearest 100. and click OK. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Unless overridden. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. In the first section. select Faces. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. you modify the detail level assignments.Number. For Unit symbol. M_Window Tag . Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags.Temporary Dimensions. (Default 3D View).Temporary Dimensions. Specifying Units of Measurement. 4 In the Project Units dialog.Under Category. and Detail Level Options on page 827. Click OK. 30 Under Leader. and click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. m_Settings-in progress. and Detail Level Options | 827 . Temporary Dimensions. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 3 In the Format dialog. In the final section. dimensions use these project settings. In the second section. 31 On the Design Bar. for Area. Unless overridden. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. select Openings. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. verify that Create is clear. for Length. 6 Click OK. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. select meters squared. 9 Under Doors and Windows. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. 32 On the View toolbar. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. click the default value. select 0 decimal places.

In this table. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. 12 Click OK. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings.rvt. click . you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this exercise. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. You do not select a view scale to move it. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. and expand 3D Views. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium.In this project. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Views (all).

2 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Views tab. and click OK. In the Project Browser. select Discipline. and click Apply. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. expand each view type.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . notice that views are grouped by phase. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 8 Select Phase. select Type/Discipline. expand Sheets (all). In the Project Browser.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. and click OK.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . and notice that each is grouped by discipline.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.

17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. under Sheets. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. expand each sheet set. 16 Click the Views tab. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. click the Folders tab. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click New. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. and click OK.

In this lesson. you select the starting point for your office template. click Training Files. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase.rte template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. and view names. navigate to your preferred directory. Creating an Office Template | 831 . Whenever you create a new project or template. View Type (Family and Type). Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. levels. If you want to save this file. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. In the lesson that follows. under Views. and click Open. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. and click OK. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. When you create new projects. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. expand Complete. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. In that case. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. expand 3D Views. Creating an Office Template on page 831. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. and Discipline.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. enter a unique file name. 21 In the Project Browser. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. and open Metric\Templates. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. when you create a new project. You can also save these settings in a template file. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. click Browse. you create an office template. dimensions styles. You can choose from several templates. and click OK. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. the same rules apply. Proceed to the next lesson. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. and expand both Architectural and Structural. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. When you create a new template based on an existing template. For example. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 2 Under Template file. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric.

In this exercise. 6 Click OK. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 15 Under Create new. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 13 Select the default template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. you modify the project settings for your new template. you can select it now.5 In the New Project dialog. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. 14 Click Open. and double-click North. 9 In the Project Browser. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . weights. select Project template. For example. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. If you have additional projects open. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. If you want to use a template other than the default. in the drawing area. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. select Project. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. close them. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. click Browse. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. for Create new. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. 7 In the Project Browser. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. When you create the material. 12 Under Template File.

transparency. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. see a preview of the rendered material. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. including color. and change render appearance properties. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. TIP For more information about creating new materials. Observe the materials that are already defined. the changes are saved as part of the project template. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. You do this by defining the render appearance. annotation objects. and move model patterns. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . and materials for model objects. you can set line weights. line colors. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. and imported objects. When you create or modify a material. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. Modifying System Settings on page 803. 4 Click Replace. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. see the previous lesson. texture. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 9 Click OK when finished. You can align. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. line patterns. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. If you change render appearance properties. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template.During this exercise. 13 If necessary. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. or refer to the online help. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. For more information. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. or modify existing patterns. specific modifications are not dictated. and similar attributes. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. rotate. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. For more details on modifying these settings. or refer to the online help. In the Object Styles dialog. create new subcategories. and scroll through the list of categories. create and modify them as needed.

create new line subcategories. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. To see the details of a particular style. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. and create new subcategories as needed. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. tags. select it from this list. click Duplicate. line color. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. 18 For existing line categories. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. and dimensions. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. modify the line weight. name the style. and click Edit. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 29 Click OK. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. such as section lines and dimension lines. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 34 Click OK. 20 Click OK. and specify the properties. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. select it.15 Modify categories. or line pattern as needed. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 19 If necessary. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. You can add and delete view scales. 32 To modify a line pattern. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary.

When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . when you add a door with the tag option selected. and Angle settings. To see the details of a particular style. 58 Click OK. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 53 For Length. angular. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. name the style. 62 Click OK. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. and specify the properties. 46 Click OK. 55 Click OK. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. In the Tags dialog. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. Volume. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 57 Specify the Slope option. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. click Load. Linear. For example. 60 Under Walls. select it from this list. TIP In the drawing area. 61 Under Doors and Windows. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style.40 Click OK. click Format. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. click Duplicate. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. and choose a decimal symbol. and radial dimensions are modified separately. and click OK. 50 To load new annotation tags. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.

73 Click OK. or Fine. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. click the Views tab. Use the table below as a checklist. 70 Click the Sheets tab. rename. create new browser organization types. Using the arrows between the columns. In such a case. or edit existing organization types. 71 Delete. create new browser organization types. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. However. or edit existing organization types. For example. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. The detail level is based on view scale. Although these settings can be saved within a template. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. and move view scales as needed. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 72 If necessary. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. See Setting up If necessary. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. click the arrows between columns. Medium. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. and make modifications in each area as necessary. In a typical project. 64 Review the table. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. To move the view scales.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. You can find additional information in Help. 65 Click OK. When you create a new view. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. 68 Delete. 69 If necessary. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. rename. Links to associated tutorials are provided.

you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. you can set the default contour line interval. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can set up the phases. Although the options are endless. title blocks. 2 In the Type Selector. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. or electrical fixtures. furniture. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. For example. However. you may want to delete. or use the Project Browser. and electrical fixtures. click Door. 75 Proceed to the next exercise.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. the section cut material. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. In the steps that follow. and the poche depth. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. Although this is possible. you could load detail components. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. do so before starting this exercise. notice the list of doors already loaded. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. modify. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Depending on the intended use of this template. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. you can move onto the next component type. if you load every available window type. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you do both. If necessary. phase filters. In addition. If this selection is satisfactory. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . You can load any family or group into a template. there are some important thoughts to consider. For example. or add to this selection.

838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. create. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Notice that each family category is listed. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. click Edit/New. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. expand Families. and click OK. create. In the Element Properties dialog. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Modify type properties.3 To modify. and click OK. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. or load a new door type. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Make modifications. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Click Duplicate. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. In the Element Properties dialog. Enter a name. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. click Load. Select it. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. and click Open. or modify a door. click Bar. click Edit/New.

Discipline. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view.) 10 Expand the title block. 13 Click OK. click Load. load. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. click 12 Click Preview. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Delete. you create the views required for your template. create. and select the title block type. In addition. This title block is currently part of the template. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . Detail Level. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you created new projects using different templates. In addition. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. To load a title block. 11 On the Options Bar. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. View Range. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. (Element Properties). Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. right-click the component. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. In this exercise. To do so. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block.

After applying the template. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. click Apply. 15 In the Project Browser. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 12 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Apply. 18 If you modified any other view templates. you can apply a view template to any view. In this exercise. At any time. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 6 Click OK. under Floor Plans. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. Every time a new plan view is created. select Site Plan. and double-click Level 1. the view is not linked to the template in any way. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. double-click Site.settings of categories and subcategories. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. double-click South. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. select Architectural Plan. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. open the view from the Project Browser. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. and click OK. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 2 Under Names. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. In addition. you will first modify view templates. under Elevations. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. and apply the appropriate template. double-click Level 2. 4 If necessary. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 11 Click Apply. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties.

right-click the ViewCube. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. in the Project Browser. use the ViewCube. click Schedule/Quantities. and select the desired direction. under Floor Plans. 30 In the Project Browser. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. right-click the view name. 23 To add more levels to the template. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. expand 3D Views. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. right-click the ViewCube. click Level. under Floor Plans.Notice the level names. 20 In the Project Browser. or an edge of the ViewCube. Rename. ceiling plans. under 3D Views. right-click Level 1. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. and click Save View. right-click {3D}. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . select Make Plan View. enter a view name. 21 In the Project Browser. Blue level heads have associated plan views. a face. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. review the floor plans. 31 Rename the 3D View. To orient the 3D view to another view. duplicate. and. review the existing floor plans. and elevations. and click Rename. or delete this view. If you want to modify view properties. click Orient to a Direction. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. If prompted. (Default 3D View). notice that you have the option to rename. in the shortcut menu. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. right-click the ViewCube. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. or delete them as needed. click Orient to View. To orient the 3D view to a direction. click 29 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. Black level heads have no associated views. By default. 27 Create additional levels as needed. 24 On the Options Bar. and select the desired view. duplicate. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Properties. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on the View toolbar. If it does not display.

You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. and click Rename. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. 42 Create new sheets as needed. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. modify settings as needed. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. click Add View.txt for AutoCAD. and click OK. 40 To add views to the sheet. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. modify settings as needed. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. You are prompted to select a title block. select and order required fields. in the Project Browser.You can add schedules to a template. and modify their properties accordingly. Select a view. To later add a title block to a sheet. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Right-click the sheet name. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. click Sheet. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. and click OK. assign filters. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. expand Sheets (all). on the View tab of the Design Bar. You can still add views to the sheet. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. select the category type. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. select the default title block. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . modify settings as needed. After the sheet is created. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. select one. On the Filter tab. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards.txt for MicroStation). you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. and click Add View to Sheet. To do so. or exportlayersdgn. On the Appearance tab. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. select the title block and delete it. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 37 Click OK. and click OK. When you import a DWG or DXF file. On the Formatting tab. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet.

2 For each category. and so on. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. They cannot be shared with other projects. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 8 In the dialog. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. When you create a multi-category schedule. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. and click Save. doors. 5 For each category. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. For example. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. select Save As. and click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . and so on. project parameters. and click Save. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. name the file. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. for example. windows. name the file. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). When scheduling. 9 Click Save As. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. These settings are retained within the project template. and they become the set mappings for the project. Using shared parameters. You can save these mappings to a text file. click Save As. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. therefore. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters.

because each office has a unique set of needs. 24 To add a shared project parameter.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. select a parameter discipline type. click Add. and choose a shared parameter. you can create a list of parameters. 10 Click OK. 22 Click OK. 9 Name the parameter. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 23 Add project parameters as needed. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. you may want to save the file to a network location. 19 Under Group parameter under. select a parameter value type. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 26 Click OK. for Name. click New. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 6 Create as many groups as needed. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. If a file already exists. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 25 Click Select. and select Shared Parameter. select Project parameter. 16 Under Parameter Data. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 5 Enter the group name. 14 Click Add. 21 Under Categories. enter a parameter name. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. and click OK. 3 Name and save the file. 17 Under Discipline. select a group to add parameters to. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. click New. add required parameters. 11 For each parameter group. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 8 Under Parameters. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . For each parameter group. project parameters. under Groups. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. and specify its discipline and type. 2 Click Create. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters.

see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. select the tag. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. By going first to the Print command. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 28 Click OK. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. and make it your default template file. For information on creating multi-category tags. Click OK. 32 Navigate to the directory. 5 Click Save As. By creating named settings within the template. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 6 In the New dialog. 35 For Name. The tag is now part of the template. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. for Name. and click OK. and click Open. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. you can load them into the template. paper placement. 37 When you have completed the schedule. save the file as a template. click OK. click Setup. or refer to the online help. 34 For Category. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. click Schedule/Quantities. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. and the percent of actual size. For each printer. you need only select a setting. enter a name for the schedule. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . In this exercise. you can set options such as sheet sizes. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. and print. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you create named print settings. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 2 Under Printer. make minor modifications if necessary. 4 Modify the printer settings. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 3 Under Settings. select Multi-Category. select a printer for which you want to create named settings.

save it in a network location. 25 Click OK. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. You can also set this template as your default template. and saved them to a template. enter a new name for the printer. select Template Files (*. 20 Click OK. and click Open. 18 Click Browse. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. In addition. click Setup. Create additional settings as needed. The only remaining task is to save it. and click Open. If you need to share this file with others. modify the printer settings. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. select it. 19 Select the template. If you have a project. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. click Browse. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. In addition. This can provide a good starting point for a template. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Save. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. and click OK.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. Your template is complete. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. By investing the time to individualize your template. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. select a different printer. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 14 Under Save as type.rte). you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. In this lesson. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 9 In the Print dialog. and create new settings for this printer. 15 Name the template. 23 For Default template file. you modified settings. 24 Navigate to the template location. 11 Click Close when finished. loaded components. click Save as. 22 Click the File Locations tab.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful